Avery Dennison 9493 Printer Reference Manual

0 28028

Packet Reference Manual

9493™ Printer

{ , 1 , A , R , E 6 0 , " F M T 1 ” ¦

C

, 2 2

0 , 1 4 2 , 0 , 3 , 1 , 1 , B L

¦

, , 2

$ 2 9 9 ¦

©2008 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved.

Each product and program carries a respective written warranty, the only warranty on which the customer can rely. Avery Dennison Corp. reserves the right to make changes in the product, the programs, and their availability at any time and without notice. Although Avery Dennison Corp.

has made every effort to provide complete and accurate information in this manual, Avery

Dennison Corp. shall not be liable for any omissions or inaccuracies. Any update will be incorporated in a later edition of this manual.

©2008 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means, without the prior written permission of Avery Dennison Corp.

WARNING

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CANADIAN D.O.C. WARNING

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of

Communications.

Le pr ésent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicte par le minist ère des Communications du Canada.

Trademarks

Monarch®, Sierra Sport4, and 9493 are trademarks of Avery Dennison Retail Information

Services LLC.

Avery Dennison® is a trademark of Avery Dennison Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows, and NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Novell and NetWare are trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.

Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

UFST, Monotype, the Monotype logo, and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Monotype Imaging,

Inc.

Avery Dennison Printer Systems Division

170 Monarch Lane

Miamisburg, OH 45342

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Using SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Using Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Creating an MPCLII Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Starting with a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Determining Format Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Determining the Print Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Drawing Rough Sketches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Using Supply Layout Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Considering Field Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Considering Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Using the Format Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Filling in the Format Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

CONFIGURING THE PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Setting Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Using MPCLII Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

MPCLII Punctuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Standard Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Using Online Configuration Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Configuration Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Making Print Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Defining the System Setup Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Defining the Supply Setup Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Defining the Print Control Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Defining the Control Characters Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Resetting Control Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Using Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Enabling Immediate Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Sending Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Defining the Communication Settings Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Defining the Backfeed Control Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Special Considerations When Using Backfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Defining the Memory Configuration Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Checking Current Buffer Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

i

About Memory Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Buffer Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Buffer Allocation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Memory Considerations with Downloaded TrueType Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Clearing Packets from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Using the Font Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Uploading Format Header Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

DEFINING FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Defining the Format Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Defining Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Defining Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Defining Constant Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Defining Line Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Defining Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

DEFINING FIELD OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Applying Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Combining Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Option 1 (Fixed Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Option 2 (Data Type Restrictions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Option 4 (Copy Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Merging Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Sub-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Option 30 (Pad Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Sample Use for Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Option 31 (Calculate Check Digit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Option 42 (Price Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Option 50 (Bar Code Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Option 52 (PDF417 Width/Length). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Option 61 (Re-image Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Using Check Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Sum of Products Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Sum of Digits Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

CREATING GRAPHICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Overview of Bitmapped Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Determining a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Designing Bitmapped Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Using the Hex Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Using the Run Length Encoding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

ii

Determining How to Store the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Using Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Using Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Using Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Creating a Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Positioning the Graphic Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Defining the Graphic Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Creating Bitmap Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Creating Next-Bitmap Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Creating Duplicate Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Sample Hex Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Sample Run Length Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Placing the Graphic in a Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Defining the Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Sample Bitmap Graphic Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Downloading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Defining the Batch Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defining the Batch Control Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defining Batch Data Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Using Special Characters in Batch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Merged or Sub-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Incrementing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Downloading Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Sequential Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Batch Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Batch Quantity Zero Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Modifying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Optional Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

STATUS POLLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Inquiry Request (ENQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Inquiry Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Job Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Job Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

iii

DIAGNOSTICS AND ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Printing a Test Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Reading a Test Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Resetting Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

If You Receive an Error Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

If the PC and Printer Are Not Communicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Calling Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Additional Diagnostics Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Format Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Batch Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Option Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Online Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Check Digit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Graphic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Data Formatting Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Machine Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Flash Memory Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Radio Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Optional Micro SD Card Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Hard Printer Failure Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

PRINTER OPTIMIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Adjusting the Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Reducing Imaging Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General Format Tips and Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Sample UPCA Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Sample MaxiCode Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Mode 2 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Mode 3 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Sample Data Matrix Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Square Data Matrix Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Rectangular Data Matrix Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Sample Data Matrix with Function 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Sample Quick Response Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

Entering Batch Data for QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

QR Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

Structured Append Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

Structured Append QR Code Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

iv

GS1 DataBar Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

HangTag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Tag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Label Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Receipt Format Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Label Sample 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Label Sample 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Sample Compliance Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Sample Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

FONTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Bitmap Font Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Monospaced Font Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Proportional Font Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

CG Triumvirateä Typeface (7 pt.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

CG Triumvirateä Typeface (9 pt.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

CG Triumvirateä Typeface (11 pt.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

CG Triumvirateä Typeface (15 pt.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold (8 pt.) Font #1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold (10 pt.) Font #1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold (12 pt.) Font #1003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold (18 pt.) Font #1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold (22 pt.) Font #1005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold Cond (6.5 pt.) Font #1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold Cond (8 pt.) Font #1007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold Cond (10 pt.) Font #1008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15




Scalable Font Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18

TrueType Font Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19

Downloading TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19

Using International Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19

Selecting a Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

International Font Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

Licensing Your Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21

Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21

v

SYMBOL SETS/CODE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Selecting a Symbol Set or Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Using Code 128 Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Entering Extended Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Using International Character Sets/Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Internal Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

ANSI Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Bold Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

OCRA Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Code Page 100 (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Code Page 101 (Wingdings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Code Page 850 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Code Page 852 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Code Page 855 (Russian). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Code Page 1250 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Code Page 1252 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Code Page 1253 (Greek) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Code Page 1254 (Turkish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Code Page 1255 (Hebrew) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

Code Page 1256 (Arabic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

Code Page 1257 (Baltic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

Binary to Hex Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20

ON (Black) Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20

OFF (White Dots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20

FORMAT DESIGN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Online Configuration Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Batch Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Check Digit Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

vi

G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

This manual provides the necessary information to design, write and print a Monarch®

Printer Control Language II (MPCLII) format on a Monarch® Sierra Sport4ä 9493ä printer. The printer supports both thermal direct and thermal transfer printing. Before you read this manual, review the printer information in the Quick Reference or

Operator's Handbook.

A b o u t T h i s M a n u a l

You do not need to be a programmer to use this manual, but you must be familiar with creating text files and using basic MS-DOS® commands. This chapter describes how to

¨

¨

¨ create and download a sample MPCLII packet.

use the Supply Layout Grid and Format Worksheet.

categorize data into field types and select fonts to use in your format.

See "Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for a list of available fonts for your printer. See

Chapter 4, "Defining Field Options," for a list of available field options for your printer.

S t a n d a r d F e a t u r e s

The following features are standard on the printer: 203 dots per inch (DPI) printhead,

4.0 inch by 12 inch maximum print image, center-justified printing, print speeds of 2, 3, or 4 inches per second (IPS), graphical LCD, 5 buttons (on/off and four context sensitive), 32MB SRAM, 32MB Flash memory, and an optional 256MB micro SD card.

P r i n t e r M e m o r y

The printer has both RAM and flash memory. You can use one or both types of memory, depending on how you use your printer.

U s i n g S R A M

Use SRAM for temporary storage. It is volatile; the contents are lost when you turn the printer off. The printer has 32MB of SRAM. SRAM can contain formats, graphics, batches, and fonts. In the header of each packet, specify the storage device as SRAM

(R). Then, download the files to the printer from a host device.

U s i n g F l a s h M e m o r y

Use flash memory for permanent storage. It is non-volatile; the contents stay in place until erased. The printer has 32MB of flash memory, depending on your configuration.

In the header of each packet, specify the storage device as F(Flash).

Every time you download these packets into flash memory, another copy is made, even if it is already in memory. After doing this several times, you will eventually use up flash memory.

1

Printer Differences 1-1

B e f o r e Yo u B e g i n

1. Connect the printer to the host. Refer to the Equipment Manual for more information.

2. Load supplies in the printer. Refer to the Equipment Manual for more information.

3. Turn on the printer.

4. Set the communication parameters and configure the printer. The communication parameters at the printer must match those at the host. See Chapter 2, "Configuring the

Printer" for more information.

5. Design your format. See “Starting with a Design” for more information.

6. Download your format to the printer. See Chapter 6, "Printing" for more information.

C r e a t i n g a n M P C L I I F o r m a t P a c k e t

A format defines which fields appear and where the fields are printed on the label. The printer requires this information in a special form, using Monarch® Printer Control Language II (MPCL).

This section describes how to create a sample MPCLII format packet.

For detailed information about the format header, text, constant text, and bar code fields, see

Chapter 3, "Defining Fields." For information about batch packets, see Chapter 6, "Printing."

1. Type the following format header in any text editor:

{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"FMT-25" p

2. Type the following constant text field:

C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT",1 p

3. Type the following bar code field:

B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 p

4. Type the following text field:

T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,1 p }

You have created a format packet for your MPCLII printer. Now, a batch packet must be created before you can print the format.

5. Type the following batch header, after the text field line:

{B,25,N,1 p

6. Type the following bar code data:

1,"02802811111" p

7. Type the following text field data:

2,"TEXT FIELD" p }

8. Save your file as SAMPLE.FMT.

1-2 Getting Started

9. Type MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1 at the DOS prompt if you are using serial communications.

This sets the communication parameters at your host. These communication parameters must match those at your printer. See “Setting Communication Parameters,” in Chapter 2 or your host’s documentation for more information.

10. Type COPY SAMPLE.FMT COM1. The following 2 inch by 2 inch label prints.

S t a r t i n g w i t h a D e s i g n

Before you create a format packet, you must design your label. There are several steps to designing a custom label:

1. Decide which fields should appear on your label. See “Determining Format Contents” for more information.

2. Determine your label size. Labels are available from us in a wide variety of sizes. Your application and the amount of data you need to print determines the supply size. Contact your Sales Representative for more information.

3. Draw a rough sketch of your label. You may want to draw several variations to see what works best. See “Drawing Rough Sketches” for more information.

4. Identify the field types that appear on your label. See “Considering Field Types” for more information.

5. Decide which fonts you want to use. See “Considering Fonts” for more information.

6. Fill out your Format Worksheet. See “Using the Format Worksheet” for more information.

At this point, you are ready to use your format.

7. Create a format packet, based on how you filled out your worksheet. See Chapter 3,

"Defining Fields" for more information.


D e t e r m i n i n g F o r m a t C o n t e n t s

Before you lay out your format, answer these questions. How large is your supply, which fonts do you want to use, do you want to include a bar code, and do you want to include graphics?

D e t e r m i n i n g t h e P r i n t A r e a

The “bottom” is the leading edge that exits the printer first. The 0,0 point is at the bottom left corner of the label. The print area is in the center of the label. The print area varies, depending on the size of your supply and supply type (thermal direct vs. thermal transfer). Below are the maximum and minimum print areas.

Unit of

Measure

English

(1/100")

Metric

(1/10mm)

Dots

(1/203 dots)

Maximum Supply

Size (Wid x Len)*

412 x 1200 TT

465 x 1200 TD

1046 x 3048 TT

1181 x 3048 TD

832 x 2436 TT

944 x 2436 TD

Maximum Print

Area (Wid x Len)*

410 x 1200 TT

425 x 1200 TD

1040 x 3048 TT

1080 x 3048 TD

832 x 2436 TT

864 x 2436 TD

Minimum Supply Size

(Wid x Len)

200 x 100

508 x 254

406 x 203

Minimum Print Area

(Wid x Len)

200 x 100

508 x 254

406 x 203

* TT = thermal transfer; TD = thermal direct

When designing formats, the following non-print zones are recommended:

Die Cut Labels:

In Peel Mode:

0.05 inches (1.3 mm) on either edge of the label

0.15 inches (3.8 mm) at the leading edge of the label

In Non-peel Mode: 0.10 inches (2.5 mm) at the leading edge of the label

Tags: 0.22 inches (5.6 mm) at the leading edge of the label

Non-tag Supply: 0.17 inches (4.3 mm) at the leading edge of the label

Note:

For exact print area measurements of your supply, see the supply layout grids in

Appendix D, "Format Design Tools."

Use the following formulas to convert inches to dots and metric:

Dots = inches x 203

Metric (1/10mm) = inches x 254

English (1/100 inch) = 100 x (dots/203)

Dots = Metric (1/10 mm) x (799/1000)

D r a w i n g R o u g h S k e t c h e s

After you decide what information you want to print, sketch how you want the information to appear on the label. Note any areas that are preprinted on the label, such as a logo.

As soon as you know what information to include on the label, and you have a rough sketch, you can use a supply layout grid to help you layout and size your label. If you do not want to use a grid, go to “Considering

Field Types” to choose what information you want on your label.


U s i n g S u p p l y L a y o u t G r i d s

A supply layout grid contains measurement markers. These markers help you accurately position information on your label. Decide whether you want to design formats using English,

Metric, or Dot measurements. Choose from the following grids:

¨ English

The English grid is measured in 1/100 inches.

¨ Metric

The Metric grid is measured in 1/10 millimeters (mm).

¨ Graphic

The printer uses dots to print images on a label. The printhead has 203 dots per inch (dpi).

Choose English or Metric units when designing formats to use with different printers.

English or Metric units allow more direct use of formats on printers with different density printheads.

If you want to use the supply layout grids, a copy of each is in Appendix D, "Format Design

Tools."

Supply Layout

(Inches)

Indicates

No-Print

Area 4.25 (Thermal Direct)

0.05

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

0.0

0.05

0,0 1.0

2.0

3.0

0.05

4.09 (Thermal Transfer)

4.0


C o n s i d e r i n g F i e l d Ty p e s

After you select a supply size, the next step in designing a format is to decide what information you want to print on the label. For example, you may want to print your company name, price of an item, and a bar code that combines information from other places. Everything you want to print falls into one of the following categories.

Field Type Description Examples

Text

Non-Printable

Text

Contains letters, numbers, or symbols you want to print.

item number, item description, department number, price, date

Holds data for use later, such as for merging into another field. The printer does not print non-printable text fields.

city, state, and zip code to be included in a bar code

Bar Code Used for printing bar codes that can be scanned.

item or serial numbers, zip codes, information you don’t want to have visible to customers company name, company address Constant Text Prints fixed characters that print without changing.

Line or Box Highlights or separates items.

Graphic Contains a bitmap image or a compliance label overlay.

line marking out the regular price, border around the supply logos

All of the above field types except graphics are discussed in Chapter 3. See Chapter 5,

"Creating Graphics" for information on including graphics in your format.

C o n s i d e r i n g F o n t s

When working with fonts, you have three considerations: font appearance, font size (scalable or bitmapped), and font spacing (monospaced or proportional). See Appendix B, "Fonts," for samples of each font.

U s i n g t h e F o r m a t W o r k s h e e t

The Format Worksheet is divided into sections that list the field types. Each section has boxes to fill in with parameters that define your format. A format worksheet is included in Appendix D,

"Format Design Tools."

F i l l i n g i n t h e F o r m a t W o r k s h e e t

Decide what type of field to use on your label.

1. Make a copy of the Format Worksheet.

2. Define the Format Header.

3. Define options as you require them. See Chapter 4, "Defining Field Options" for more information.


C O N F I G U R I N G T H E P R I N T E R

This chapter discusses how to

¨

¨

¨

¨ set communication parameters.

upload the printer’s configuration or font information.

configure the printer using online configuration packets.

use immediate commands to control the printer’s operation at any time.

S e t t i n g C o m m u n i c a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s

Use the following information if you are connecting to the printer’s 9-pin serial port.

The communication parameters at the printer must match those at the host, or you will not be able to communicate.

Use the communication settings packet to set communication parameters for your printer.

On MS-DOS computers, you can use the MODE command to set communication values on your PC.

For example

MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1

This command sets your host to these communication values:

¨ a baud rate of 9600

¨ no parity

¨ 8 bit word length

¨ 1 stop bit

2

Configuring the Printer 2-1

U s i n g M P C L I I C o n v e n t i o n s

Here are some guidelines to follow when using MPCLII.

M P C L I I P u n c t u a t i o n

Use the following symbols when creating MPCLII packets:

Character

{ (left bracket)

} (right bracket) p (vertical bar)

, (comma)

“ABC”

(quotation marks)

'comment'

(single quotation marks)

Decimal

Value

123

125

124

044

034

039

Description

start of header end of header field separator* parameter separator

Quotation marks enclose character strings. Empty quotes (“”) identify null strings or unused fields.

Grave accents enclose comments. Any data enclosed in grave accents is ignored. Do not embed comments within a quoted string. Grave accents are also used to reject mainframe data.

* The field separator is the split vertical bar, which we are representing as p in this manual. The decimal value is 124. To enter this character, use the Shift key plus the Split Vertical Bar key on your computer’s keyboard. Depending on your text editor, it may appear as a solid vertical bar or as a split vertical bar.

Note:

These MPCL characters are the default.

S t a n d a r d S y n t a x G u i d e l i n e s

When creating MPCLII packets:

¨ Begin each packet with a start of header ({).

¨ End each packet with an end of header (}).

¨ Define no more than 1000 fields in a format. Each p indicates one field. However, options are not counted as fields. The actual number of fields a format can have may be less, because the number of fields is limited by the available memory.

¨ The field number (0 to 999) must be unique. We recommend starting at 1, instead of 0.

¨ Do not use a field number more than once per format.

¨ Define all fields in the order you want to image/print them. The printer does not print in field number order.

¨ Separate all parameters with a Parameter Separator (,).

¨ End each field with a Field Separator ( p ).

¨ Enter all information in CAPITAL letters, except words or phrases within quotation marks.

¨ Include all parameters for a field unless documented as optional.

¨ Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.

¨ Multiple options can be used with most fields. Options can be used in any combination except as noted with each definition. Options are processed in the order they are received.

¨ Keep in mind that proportionally spaced fonts need wider fields than monospaced fonts. For variable field data, use a letter “W” to determine the maximum field size.

2-2 Configuring the Printer

¨ Do not place a new line (return) or any other non-printing character within a field definition.

However, a carriage return or line break after each p makes your formats easier to read.

T,1,20,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

T,2,10,V,50,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

¨ Spaces are ignored, except within character strings.

¨ Indenting options improves readability of your formats.

T,1,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

R,42,1 p

¨ Use a tilde (~) followed by a 3-digit ASCII code in a quoted string to send function codes or extended characters or send the 8-bit ASCII code.

You can modify formats and fields with the optional entry method. See “Optional Entry Method” in Chapter 6 for more information.

U s i n g O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t s

Use online configuration packets to change the printer’s settings. You can send an individual configuration packet or a single packet containing all the configuration packets. Supply all parameters for each packet. Leave the parameters blank that you do not need to change. For example,

{

I

,A,,,,1

p prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online System Setup parameters.

Make a copy of the online configuration worksheet in Appendix D, "Format Design Tools," and save the original. Packets A-M are listed on the worksheet.

When you turn off the printer, all the information in the online configuration packets is saved and used when the printer is turned back on. After you change printer configurations, you must resend the format, batch, or graphic to the printer before the changes take effect.

Always include an

I

, im me di ately af ter the left bracket { and be fore the packet iden ti fier (A, B,

C, etc.). The

I

pa ram e ter iden ti fies the data stream as a con fig u ra tion packet.

Note:

Include the

I

pa ram e ter with each packet if you are send ing them in di vid u ally. In clude it only at the be gin ning of a data stream if you are send ing mul ti ple pack ets.


This is the syntax to use when you create online configuration packets:

Syntax

{

I,

A, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p

B, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p

C, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p

D, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 3 p

E, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 9 p

F, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p

G, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 4 p

M, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 4 p

}

Syntax for single packet

Start of Header

Con fig u ra tion Header

Sys tem Setup

Sup ply Setup

Print Con trol

Mon e tary For mat ting

Con trol Char ac ters

Com mu ni ca tion Set tings

Backfeed Con trol

Mem ory Con fig u ra tion

End of Header

{

I,

A, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5

}

Start of Header

Con fig u ra tion Header

Sys tem Setup

End of Header

You can also add a configuration to RAM or specify units for supply, print, or margin positions.

If you use the optional parameters with the I packet, any online configuration packets following the split vertical bar ( p ) must specify distances using the selected units. However, the test labels display the units in dots, even if you entered them in English or Metrics units.

Syntax

{header,ID#,action,device p }

1. header

2. ID#

3. action

4. device

Example

Constant I.

ID. Use 0.

Action. Options:

A

Add configuration.

U

Upload User Configuration.

Storage Device. Use R (Volatile RAM).

{

I,0,A,R,E p

C,0,25,0,0,0

p }

Adds a configuration to non-volatile RAM and specifies English units. It also uses the default contrast, moves print 0.25 inches closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the default printhead width.

If you do not use the optional parameters, the syntax for the online configuration packets does not change. For example,

{

I,C,0,50,0,0,0 p } uses the default contrast, moves print 50 dots (0.25) inches closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the default printhead width.


Example

{

I,0,U,N p }

Uploads the printer configuration from volatile RAM and returns the following to the host.

A,0,0,0,0,0 p

B,0,1,0,0,0 p

C,0,0,0,0,0,0 p

D,1,0,2 p

E,"~123~044~034~124~125~126~094","","~013~010" p

F,3,1,0,0,1 p

G,0,65,65 p

M,R,60405,42565,N,0 p

M,R,R,635 p

M,T,R,10 p

M,I,R,25705 p

M,V,R,10235 p

The parameters for each packet (A-M) are displayed. The remaining lines beginning with M list the buffer sizes in 1/10K for the Receive, Transmit, Image, Downloadable Fonts, Formats, and

Scalable Fonts Buffers. See each packet description later in this chapter for more information.

C o n f i g u r a t i o n S y n t a x G u i d e l i n e s

When creating a printer configuration packet:

¨ Follow the “Standard Syntax Guidelines” listed at the beginning of this chapter.

¨ The first character after the start of header ({) is the configuration header (

I

).

¨ Download multiple configuration packets within one packet or download a single configuration packet.

¨ If you change any of the online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so the configuration changes take effect.

¨ Include the first five ANSI codes, at a minimum, in the control characters packet.

¨ Send configuration packets once per session (each time the printer is turned off and then back on), not with every format or batch packet.

¨ Make sure the communication settings at the host match those at the printer.

M a k i n g P r i n t A d j u s t m e n t s

You can adjust where the printer prints on your supply by adjusting the supply, print, or margin positions. However, keep in mind the following:

¨ Supply adjustments across the width of your supply, such as the margin position, are based in dots. The printhead is 203 dots per inch.

¨ Supply adjustments for the length of your supply, such as supply position or print adjustment, are measured in ½03 of an inch, regardless of your printhead density.


D e f i n i n g t h e S y s t e m S e t u p P a c k e t

Use the system setup packet (A) to select the power up mode, display language, print separators between batches, print a “slashed zero,” and select the symbol set.

Syntax

{

I,A,powup_mode,lan guage,sep_on,slash_zero, sym bol_set p}

A1. A

System Setup Packet

A2. powup_mode Online Mode. Enter 0.

A3. language

Display Language. Options:

0

1

2

3

4

13

English (default)

French

German

Spanish (for Spain)

Japanese

Simplified Chinese

A4. sep_on

Batch Separators. Enter 0. The printer does not print batch separators.

A5. slash_zero

Slash Zero. Options:

0

Print a standard zero (default)

1

Print a zero with a slash through it

A6. symbol_set

Symbol Set. Options:

0

Internal

1

2

ANSI

Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)

5

6

3

4

Code Page 850 (Latin 1)


Code Page 1251 (Cy ril lic)


11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

Code Page 1253 (Greek)

Code Page 1254 (Turk ish)

Code Page 1255 (He brew)

Code Page 1256 (Arabic)

Code Page 1257 (Bal tic)

Code Page 1258 (Viet nam ese)

DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)

DOS Code Page 855 (Rus sian)

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turk ish)

DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Por tu guese)

Wingdings

Macintosh

Unicode

BIG5

GB2312

SJIS (Shift JIS) to SJIS (Code Page 932, Jap a nese)

GB2312 to GB2312 (Code Page 936, Sim pli fied Chi nese)

BIG5 to BIG5 (Code Page 950, Tra di tional Chinese)

Note:

The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the Internal Symbol Set

(0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and

850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font (font 50) does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic).

Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded TrueTypeâ fonts or the scalable font. Symbol sets 19-24 require a downloaded International TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages" for more information.

Example

{

I,A,0,0,0,1,0 p }

Powers up the printer in the online mode, displays prompts in English, does not print a separator after each batch, prints zeros with slashes through them, and uses the internal symbol set.


D e f i n i n g t h e S u p p l y S e t u p P a c k e t

Use the supply setup packet (B) to select supply type, ribbon, feed mode, supply position, and cut position.

Syntax

{

I,B,sup ply_type,rib bon,feed_mode,sup ply_posn p}

B1. B

Supply Setup Packet

B2. supply_type

Supply Type. Options:

0

Black mark supply (default). The printer automatically senses

1

2

the type of black mark supplies.

Die Cut/edge aperture supply

Continuous (non-indexed) supply

B3. ribbon

Note:

You must use continuous (non-indexed) supply in continuous mode. You may need to adjust the print contrast (in the Print Control packet) based on the type of supply you are using.

Ribbon. Options:

0

Ribbon not installed (thermal direct)

1

2

Ribbon installed (thermal transfer)

High Energy ribbon installed

B4. feed_mode

Feed Mode. Options:

0

Continuous operation (default)

1

On-demand mode

B5. supply_posn Supply Position. Range: -10 to 99 in ½03 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts the machine to print at the vertical 0,0 point on the supply. This adjustment accounts for mechanical tolerances from machine to machine. The supply position adjustment only needs to be made on the initial machine setup. Adjust the supply position if formats do not start at the 0,0 point on the supply. Increase the supply position to move print up, decrease to move print down on the label. To verify the 0,0 point, print a test label. See “Printing a Test Label” in Chapter 8 for more information.

You can not change the supply position while the printer is active. Changing the supply position affects the print position. Once the supply position is set, use the print control packet to adjust the print position.

Example

{

I,B,0,0,1,10 p }

Indicates black mark and thermal direct stock has been loaded, causes the printer to operate in on-demand mode, and feeds the supply approximately .05 inches up before printing the format on each label (10/203 inches).


D e f i n i n g t h e P r i n t C o n t r o l P a c k e t

Use the print control packet (C) to set the contrast, print, and margin adjustment, print speed, and printhead width.

Syntax

{

I,C,con trast,print_adj,mar gin_ad just,speed_adj, ph_width p }

C1. C

C6. ph_width

Print Control Packet

C2. contrast

C3. print_adj

Print Contrast. Range: -390 to 156. 0 is the default. You may need to adjust this value depending on the type of supplies you are using.

Print adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 in ½03 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts where data prints vertically on the supply. Increase the print position to move print up, decrease to move print down.

C4. margin_adj

Margin adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 in ½03 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts where data prints horizontally on the supply. Increase the margin position to move print to the right, decrease to move print to the left. Margin and print position are format adjustments. They do not effect the supply position.

C5. speed_adj

Print Speed in inches per second (ips). Options:

0

The printer determines the print speed automatically.

20

30

40

This is the default.

Uses a print speed of 2.0 ips.

Uses a print speed of 3.0 ips

Uses a print speed of 4.0 ips

Note:

Serial bar codes, lines, and graphics print at 2.0 ips.

Width of the printhead in dots. Use 0.

Example

{

I,C,0,-20,-10,0,0 p }

Uses the default contrast, moves print 0.1 inch closer to the bottom of the supply (20/203 inches) and .05 inch to the left on the supply (10/203 inches), the printer prints at the default speed, and uses the default printhead width.


D e f i n i n g t h e M o n e t a r y F o r m a t t i n g P a c k e t

The monetary formatting packet (D) selects the monetary symbols to print for a price field. Use the monetary formatting packet to select primary and secondary monetary symbols, and designate the number of digits to appear at the right of a decimal.

Syntax

{

I,D,cur_sym,sec ond ary,dec i mals p }

D1. D

D2. cur_sym

D3. secondary

D4. decimals

Monetary Formatting Packet

Currency Symbol. Options:

0

No symbol

1

2

3

4

5

USA ($, Dollar- default)

UK ( £, Pound)

Japan (¥, Yen)

Germany ( 1, Deutsche Mark)

France (F, Franc)

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

Spain (P, Peseta)

Italy (L., Lira)

Sweden (Kr, Krona)

Finland (

2, Markka)

Austria (

6, Shilling)

India (Rs, Rupee)

Russian (

3, Ruble)

Korean (

4, Won)

Thai (

5, Baht)

Chinese (

¥, Yuan)

Euro-Dollar (

c

)

Note:

To use these symbols, select the internal symbol set.

Secondary Sign. Secondary symbols only print if you designate at least one decimal place.

Options:

0

1

No secondary sign (default)

Print secondary sign

Number of digits to the right of the decimal. Options:

0

No digits

1

2

3

One digit

Two digits (default)

Three digits

Example

{

I,D,1,1,2 p }

Prints the dollar sign, uses a secondary symbol, and places two digits to the right of the decimal.


D e f i n i n g t h e C o n t r o l C h a r a c t e r s P a c k e t

Use the control characters packet (E) to change the MPCLII control characters, enable and disable the immediate commands, and change the default terminator character for job requests and ENQ’s.

Changes take effect with the first character following the end of header character } of the configuration packet. Each control character must be unique and cannot appear anywhere else in your packet, except within quotation marks. You can customize the trailer characters to work with your host.

Note:

Wait two seconds for the new characters to take effect before sending packets using the new characters.

Use the following syntax for the control characters packet. Notice all but the first parameter are within quotation marks.

Syntax

{

I,E,"ANSI_cd","string1","string2" p }

E1. E

E2. “ANSI_cd”

E3. “string 1"

E4. “string 2"

Control Characters Packet

~123

~044

~034

~124

~125

~126

Start of header

Parameter ,

{ separator

Quoted strings

Field separator

End of header

Data escape character (optional)

“ p

}

~~

(left bracket)

(comma)

(quotes)

(pipe sign)

(right bracket)

(double tilde)

def. ch.

Immediate command character (optional).

Up to any 3 characters in the 0 to 255 decimal range. The character must be defined before this command can be used. The caret (~094) is normally used.

Note:

“ANSI_cd” includes seven separate parameters. The first five parameters are required.

The other parameters are optional.

Terminator for status requests and ENQ requests. Up to any 3 characters in the 0-255 decimal range. The default is “013". Sending ”" disables this sequence.

Terminator for job requests and data uploads. Up to any 3 characters in the 0-255 decimal range.

The default is none. Sending “” disables this sequence.

After you change these parameters, all packets, including any future configuration packets, must use the new control characters. We recommend using the tilde and ASCII character code sequence when sending this packet multiple times. Also, set the packet delimiters to characters within the 21 hex to 7E hex range.

You must send the control characters packet to enable the immediate commands. An immediate command executes immediately, even if it is embedded within quotation marks, and all data following the command in the string is ignored.

Example

{

I,E,"~123~063~034~124~125~126~094" p }

Changes the parameter separator character from , to ?. The other control characters remain unchanged. It also enables the immediate commands by defining the ^ symbol as the command identifier.


R e s e t t i n g C o n t r o l C h a r a c t e r s

You can change the characters in the previous example back to their original settings by downloading this packet:

{

I?E?"~123~044~034~124~125~126~094" p }

Notice that the parameter separator is ? in this packet. This is the parameter separator that was set before this packet. Once the packet is received by the printer, the new parameter separator

(a comma, in this case) is valid.

Be careful when using this feature. If you forget what the control characters were changed to, print a test label. (The test label lists the current control characters.) See “Printing a Test

Label,” in Chapter 8 for more information.

U s i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s

Immediate commands effect printer operation as soon as the printer receives them, even if they are included within a packet or used inside quotation marks.

You can use immediate commands to change immediate command or status polling control characters, reset the printer, or cancel and repeat batches.

E n a b l i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s

When the printer is first turned on, these commands are not available. To use these commands, you must first send the control characters packet and define the immediate command control character. The immediate command control character is saved when you turn off the printer.

Once the immediate command control character is defined, the immediate commands are enabled.

S e n d i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s

Immediate commands consist of a three- or four-character sequence you can send in a packet or embed in your application. Each command must be sent separately.

Syntax

control character_immediate command

The printer can accept only one immediate command at a time. Sending a command before the previous one is completed can result in an error.

Example

^CB

Immediately cancels the batch currently printing unless an error exists on the printer. This example assumes that the defined immediate command control character is the caret (^).

The table represents the defined immediate command control character as ^ and the defined status polling control character as d. You may define these characters to suit your needs.


Command

^CA

Parameter

Cancels all the batches in the queue unless an error exists on the printer.

^CB

Cancels only the current batch being printed unless an error exists.

^DD or ^DCd Disables the MPCL data escape character (the tilde) and inhibits MPCL from acting on ANY data escape sequence from the host. Sets the MPCL data escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be any ASCII character.

ÊA

Aborts an error condition. This command is the same as pressing Escape to clear an error. May need to be sent multiple times. Use ^RB to reprint batch.

CAUTION: This command causes the current batch to stop and the condition that caused the error to remain uncorrected.

ÊR

^FD

Resets the error. This command is the same as pressing Enter to acknowledge an error. Normal operation resumes.

Feeds a label when printer is idle. Simulates the operation of pressing FEED and dispenses the next label if the printer is in the on-demand mode.

Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.

ÎD or ÎCd

^MC

Disables the Immediate Command feature by turning off the Immediate Command escape character. Sets the

Immediate Command escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be any ASCII character. Use ÎE to enable immediate commands.

Returns the customer ID or RPQ version to the host. (00 to 99)

^MD

Returns the printhead dot density to the host. 00 = 203 dpi

^MF

Uploads the MIF file to the host.

^MI

Returns the customer ID or RPQ revision level to the host. (00 to 99)

^MM

Returns the model number to the host. 51 = 9493

^MP

Returns the prototype number to the host. (00 to 99)

^MR

Returns the revision number to the host. (00 to 99)

^MS

Returns the flash file system information.

^MV

Returns the version number to the host. (00 to 99)

^PR

^RB

^RS

^TF

Resets the printer. This command takes five seconds to complete and then the printer is ready to receive data. It has the same effect as turning off and then turning on the printer. Note: Command should be used only when the printer is not printing.

Repeats the last printed batch, printing the same number of labels as specified in the original batch. This command does not work if using batch separators.

Note:

Printer ignores this command if printing.

Resynchronizes supply when supply roll is changed.

Note:


Uploads the micro SD card status as N/A (not installed) or Installed (micro SD card ready for use).

^TP

ÛD

Prints a test label.

Note:


Uploads the micro SD card directory. The list of files and their sizes are returned to the host.

Note:

To use the immediate command control character or the status polling character within your data, use the tilde sequence.


Example

ÛD

File Name: PCL_223.TTF, File Size: 4516

File Name: PCL_160.INI, File Size: 64














K bytes Free: 470896

The “PCL_” designates a font file, the number is the font number used in the text or constant text field and “.TTF” designated a True Type font file. The size of the file is shown in bytes.

D e f i n i n g t h e C o m m u n i c a t i o n S e t t i n g s P a c k e t

Use the communication settings packet (F) to set the baud rate, word length, stop bits, parity, and flow control for serial communications.

Changing the communication settings takes approximately two seconds. Communications sent during this interval will be lost. Make sure the host communication values match the values on the printer and the host is capable of communicating at the speed you select for the printer.

Do not add any characters, such as a carriage return/line feed, in your communication settings packet or communications errors may occur.

Syntax

{

I,F,baud,word_length,stop_bits,par ity, flow_con trol p }

F1. F

Communication Settings Packet

F2. baud

Baud Rate. Options:

0 1200

1 2400

2 4800

4 19200

5 38400

6 57600

3 9600 (default) 7 115200

F3. word_length

Word Length. Options:

0

7-bit word length (odd or even parity only)

1

8-bit word length (default)

F4. stop_bits

Stop Bits. Options:

0

1

1-stop bit (default)

2-stop bits

F5. parity

Parity. Options:

0

None (default)

1

2

ODD parity

EVEN parity

F6. flow_control

Flow Control. Options:

0

1

None

DTR (default)

2

3

(CTS)

XON/XOFF

Note:

If you use the DOS COPY command to download your formats, set “Flow Control” to DTR

(not XON/XOFF).


Example

{

I,F,3,1,0,0,1 p }

Uses 9600 baud, an 8-bit word length, one stop bit, no parity, and the DTR mode.

D e f i n i n g t h e B a c k f e e d C o n t r o l P a c k e t

Use the backfeed control packet (G) to enable or disable the backfeed option, set the dispense position and the backfeed distance. Backfeed works by advancing each printed label to the desired dispense position. Once that label is removed, the next label to be printed is backed up underneath the printhead. In continuous mode, only the last label in the batch is advanced to the dispense position. You may need to adjust the dispense position to allow labels to be removed, die cut labels to be removed easily, or to prevent them from falling off.

Do not use backfeed with supplies less than 0.75 inches. We recommend using 0.5-inch gap supplies in peel mode when backfeed is disabled.

The dispense position and backfeed distance are optional parameters and do not have to be specified. However, they allow for greater precision when positioning the supply. You cannot change the backfeed distance while the printer is active.

Syntax

{

I,G,action,dis_pos,bkfd_dis p }

G1. G

G2. action

G3. dis_pos

G4. bkfd_dis

Backfeed Control Packet

Action. Options:

0

disable backfeed (default)

1

enable backfeed

Dispense Position. Adjusts the stopping point of the label. 10 to 200 dots (default 65 dots).

Backfeed Distance. Amount to move label backwards. 10 to 200 dots (default 65 dots). This distance can not be greater than the dispense position.

The backfeed distance should equal the dispense position. An exception is if you are tearing instead of peeling. Then, the backfeed distance must be 30 dots (.150 inches) less than the dispense position. However, you will have a 30 dot non-print zone on your supply. The 30-dot difference accounts for improper tearing of butt cut supplies, because you do not want any exposed adhesive under the printhead.

Example

{

I,G,1,50,10 p }

Enables backfeed and sets the dispense position to 0.25 inches (50/203) and the backfeed distance to 0.05 inches (10/203).


S p e c i a l C o n s i d e r a t i o n s W h e n U s i n g B a c k f e e d

Make a note of the following items:

¨ Be careful when tearing supplies, because the adhesive can adhere to the printhead or platen roller.

¨ Backfeed effects each label in the on-demand mode or the first and last label of the batch in continuous mode.

¨ When backfeed is enabled and multiple batches are sent, the printer may not backfeed between each batch.

¨ Backfeed should only be used when you need to advance labels to the desired dispense point.

¨ Backfeed does not interfere with the supply, print, or margin positions you have set.

¨ If the supply inter-label gap is not between .07 inch to .15 inch (14 to 30 dots), you must adjust the dispense position and backfeed distance accordingly.

See the following graphic for a representation of the following adjustments: dispense position, backfeed distance, supply position, print position, and margin position.

Contact Technical Support if you have problems adjusting where the format prints on the supply.


1

1.5

2

2.5

153

229.5

D e f i n i n g t h e M e m o r y C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t

Use the memory configuration packet (M) to customize the size of your printer’s buffers, which gives you greater flexibility in your formats.

Memory must be allocated in 1/2K increments. The memory configuration packet does not accept decimals, so enter whole numbers. Multiply the amount to reallocate (in K) by 10. For example,

To reallocate (in K) Enter this amount

10

15

20

25

1530

2295

Each buffer’s allocated memory remains in effect until that buffer is reallocated. For this reason, you may want to reallocate all the buffers when reallocating any buffer. If you reallocate more memory than you have available, you will receive an error.

Syntax

{

I,M,buffer,de vice,buffer_size p }

M1. M

M2. buffer

Memory Configuration Packet

Buffer type. Options:

D

F

I

R

T

V

Downloadable Fonts

Format

Image

Receive

Transmit

Scalable (vector) fonts

M3. device

Storage type. Options:

F

Flash

R

(volatile SRAM)

M4. buffer size

Buffer size in 1/10K ranges. Options:

10 - 40

20 - 10240

Transmit (10 is the default)

Receive (640 is the default)

320 - 2631 Image (2631 is the default)

160 - 10240

Format (1280 is the default)

80 - 81920

Downloadable Fonts (640 is the default)

320 - 81920

Scalable Fonts (12410 is the default)

Example

{

I,M,I,R,1530 p }

Stores the image buffer in volatile RAM and allocates 153K for it.


C h e c k i n g C u r r e n t B u f f e r S i z e s

Send a configuration upload packet to check the sizes of your current buffers. See

“Configuration Packet Header” for more information. After you check your current buffer sizes you can begin reallocating memory.

If you want to increase your image buffer and you will not be using scalable fonts, add that memory into your image buffer.

Example

{I,M,R,R,20

p

M,T,R,10 p

M,D,N,80 p

M,V,R,320 p

M,F,R,3200 p }

Receive buffer 2K

Transmit buffer 1K

Downloadable fonts 8K

Scalable fonts buffer 32K

Format buffer 320K

Make sure memory is available before adding memory to a buffer. In the above example, if the format buffer (M,F,R,3200) was defined before the downloadable fonts and scalable fonts buffers (M,D,N,80 and M,V,R,320) were defined, an error would have occurred.

A b o u t M e m o r y B u f f e r s

Transmit Buffer

Used to send ENQ, job, and upload responses. This buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.

Receive Buffer

Image Buffer

Used to save data received from the host before it is processed by the printer. Changing this buffer size affects the amount of data the printer can receive without using flow control. This buffer must be allocated as volatile

(R) RAM.

Used to image the current format. An image up to 12 inches can be created

with the default image buffer size.

You can decrease the size of this buffer to allocate memory for the downloadable or scalable fonts buffer. Use the formula below to calculate the required image buffer size.

Example

21K x Length

Length is the length of your label in inches.

21K x 6 = 126K

(Multiply by 10.)

126K x 10 = 1260

Enter 1260 for your Image buffer.


Format Buffer

Downloadable

Fonts Buffer

Scalable (Vector)

Fonts Buffer

Used to store formats, batch data, and graphics. Use the following formula to calculate the required format buffer size:

Linecount x 50/1024

Linecount is the number of lines in your format packet including the format header and all the options.

The result of the above calculation is in kilobytes.

Used to store downloaded soft TrueType fonts. To determine the size of your downloadable fonts, send a font packet. The file size, in bytes, is the minimum amount needed in this buffer. See “Using the Font Packet” for more information.

Used to image the scalable or downloaded TrueType font characters.

Increasing this buffer size allows more characters to be saved in cache memory, so the characters do not have to be re-built the next time they are printed. Use 320 if you are not using scalable/TrueType fonts. This buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.

The printer does not print the fonts if there is not enough memory in this buffer to image them.

B u f f e r W o r k s h e e t

Make copies of this page to use as a buffer worksheet.


B u f f e r A l l o c a t i o n C o n s i d e r a t i o n s

Keep these items in mind when allocating memory.

¨ Do not allocate more memory than what is available.

¨ Free memory from one buffer before you add it to another buffer.

¨ Reallocate all the buffers if you need to reallocate any buffer.

¨ Send all buffer (re)allocations in one packet. The printer evaluates each individual buffer allocation separately. If one buffer allocation is invalid, the entire packet is invalid. For example, if you send

{

I,M,R,N,20 p

M,T,N,60 p

...} the printer ignores the entire packet, because the second line allocates 6K for the transmit buffer, and 4K is the maximum for that buffer. If you define a buffer size that exceeds the maximum value, an error occurs. However, no information is lost.

¨ Whenever the printer accepts a memory configuration packet, it takes effect immediately, causing a printer reset. Any information contained in the buffers is lost. Resend your formats, batches, graphics, or fonts to the printer.

¨ If you remap your image buffer, make sure the length and width specified in your format header are not too large for the current image buffer. In other words, if you remap for a 4 x

10 inch label, you cannot print a

4 x 12 inch label without receiving an error, until you change your format header or increase your image buffer.

M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s w i t h D o w n l o a d e d Tr u e Ty p e F o n t s

¨ The size of the TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must have available in the downloadable fonts buffer.

¨ The scalable (vector) fonts buffer is used to image the downloaded fonts (TrueType). If you are using several downloaded TrueType fonts, you may need 100K or more in this buffer.

The printer does not print the fonts if there is not enough memory in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.

¨ To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.


C l e a r i n g P a c k e t s f r o m M e m o r y

You may want to remove packets from the printer to increase memory storage capacity or if the formats/fonts are no longer needed. In some cases, turning the printer off may clear the packets from memory. If not, send a format clear packet.

Syntax

{header,packet#,action,device

p }

1. header

2. packet#

3. action

4. device

Identifies the packet. Options:

A

Check Digit Scheme

F

G

W

Format

Graphic

Font

Identification number of the packet to clear (1 to 999) or font number

(0 to 9999). 0 is for all fonts.

Action. Enter C to clear the packet.

Storage device. Use R (Volatile RAM).

Example

{F,1,C,R

p }

Clears Format #1 from volatile RAM.

U s i n g t h e F o n t P a c k e t

You can use a font packet to add or clear downloaded fonts from memory, upload your font buffer, or upload the cell size information for a particular font. The font packet is useful when you are downloading fonts. If you are using downloaded fonts, the font number and the number of bytes each downloaded font uses is listed.

This packet does not list the number of bytes the standard printer fonts use.

Use the MONARCH® MPCL Toolbox Font Utility (available on our Web site) to create the font header and data. Refer to the online help for more information.

Syntax

{W,font#,action,device,data_length,data_record p }

W1. W

Writable Font Header.

W2. font#

W3. action

The font identifier from 0 to 32000.

0 is for all fonts. 1 to 5 digits is the font number.

Example: 3 is the standard printer font, Bold.

Action. Options:

A

Adds the specified font.

C

H

M

Clears all or specified fonts, except ones in flash.

Uploads font size information.

Uploads font memory usage information.

W4. device

Device. Options:

M

Micro SD card

R

Z

Volatile RAM

All devices (use for upload).

W5. data_length

(optional)

The length of the font data. The range is 68 to 16384.

If you are creating fonts, you need to have font data included with this packet.

W6. data_ record

(optional)

Multiple data records define the font. The first character is either an

H (hex) or an R (run-length), referring to the algorithm. The rest of the record is up to 2710 characters of font data in double quotes. Separate the algorthm and the data with a comma, and end the record with p .


Example

{W,0,M,R

p }

Selects all fonts and checks the memory usage in RAM. The printer returns the following to the host:

{W,0,M,R p

Number of bytes free, Number of bytes used

p }

Example

{W,0,H,Z p }

Selects all fonts and uploads the font size information for any downloaded fonts.

The printer returns the following to the host:

{W,0,H,Z p

Font Style

Font Name

0,1,0,"Standard",0,0,0,14,22,14,22,3 p

0,2,0,"Reduced",0,0,0,7,14,7,14,1

0,3,0,"Bold",0,0,0,24,34,24,34,3

0,4,0,"OCRA",0,0,0,13,24,13,24,3 p p p

Spacing

Baseline

Cell Width

0,5,0,"HR1",0,0,0,12,20,12,20,2 p

Cell Height

0,6,0,"HR2",0,0,0,10,16,10,16,1 p

0,10,0,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p

Nominal Width

0,10,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p

Nominal Height

0,10,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p

0,10,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p

0,11,0,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p

0,11,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p

0,11,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p

0,11,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p

Inter-Character Gap

Type

0,15,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p

0,15,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p

0,15,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p

Printhead Density

0,15,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p

0,16,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p

0,16,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p

0,16,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p

Symbol Set

0,16,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p

0,17,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p

0,17,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p

0,17,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p

0,17,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p

0,18,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p

0,18,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p

0,18,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p

0,18,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p

0,1000,0,"CGTriumv6.5",1,0,6,19,23,8,1,0 p

0,1001,0,"CGTriumv8",1,0,7,22,28,10,15,0 p

0,1002,0,"CGTriumv10",1,0,8,28,34,12,17,0 p

0,1003,0,"CGTriumv12",1,0,9,33,41,15,22,0 p

0,1004,0,"CGTriumv18S",1,0,11,46,51,22,33,0 p

0,1005,0,"CGTriumv22s",1,0,14,55,63,27,41,0 p

0,1006,0,"CGTriBd6.5",1,0,6,18,23,6,11,0 p

0,1007,0,"CGTriBd8",1,0,7,22,29,8,14,0 p


0,1008,0,"CGTriBd10",1,0,8,28,35,10,17,0 p

0,1009,0,"CGTriBd12",1,0,9,33,41,11,22,0 p

0,1010,0,"CGTriBd18S",1,0,10,42,49,17,34,0 p

0,1011,0,"CGTriBd22S",1,0,12,51,60,21,42,0 p

0,1012,0,"LGothBd6.5",0,0,5,9,21,6,10,1 p

0,1013,0,"LGothBd9",0,0,7,14,31,10,15,2 p

0,50,0,"Swiss Bold",1,1,95840 p }

The CG Triumvirateä typefaces are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.

Spacing

Type

Baseline

Cell Width

Cell Height

Nominal Width

Monospaced (0) or proportional (1).

Bitmapped (0) or scalable (1).

Bottom of the font.

Horizontal number of dots to contain the widest character.

Vertical number of dots to contain the tallest character.

Average width for lower-case letters.

Nominal Height

Inter-Character

Gap

Average height for lower-case letters.

Default spacing between characters in monospaced fonts.

Printhead Density

Shows what printhead density is used (0 for 203 dpi). The scalable font

(font 50) does not report a value for printhead density.

U p l o a d i n g F o r m a t H e a d e r I n f o r m a t i o n

You can upload format header information from the formats in memory to check the supply length and width for each format.

Syntax

{header,format#,action,device p }

F1. header

F2. format#

F3. action

F4. device

Format Header

Format number from 0 to 999. 0 is for all formats in memory.

Action. Options:

A

Adds the specified format

C

H

Clears the specified format

Uploads format header information

Device. Options:

R

Volatile RAM

Z

All devices (use for upload)


Example

{F,0,H,Z

p }

Selects all formats in memory and returns the following:

Example

{F,0,H,Z p

Fmt_1,406,406

p

Fmt_10,324,406 p

Fmt_15,812,812

p

Fmt_20,305,609

p

Fmt_25,1218,406

p }

Displays the format number, supply length and supply width (in dots) for each format in memory.

Example

{F,1,H,Z

p }

Selects format1 and returns the following to the host:

{F,1,H,Z

p

Fmt_1,406,406 }

Displays the supply length and supply width (in dots) for format1.



D E F I N I N G F I E L D S

This chapter provides a reference for defining

¨

¨

¨

¨ the format header text and constant text bar code fields line and box fields.

3

Defining Fields 3-1

D e f i n i n g t h e F o r m a t H e a d e r

A Format Header begins a format file.

Syntax

{F,format#,action,device,measure,length, width,"name" p

F1. F

F2. format#

F3. action

F4. device

F5. measure

F6. length

F7. width

F8. “name”

Example

Format Header.

Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the format.

Note:

There is a demo label loaded into the printer (as a graphic). If you create a format numbered 998, it prints as the demo label. To print the demo label, press A under P, press T, use U or D to scroll until you see Demo Label. Then, press e.

Action. Enter A to add the format to the printer.

Format storage device. Options:

F

Flash Memory

R

Volatile RAM

Unit of measure. Options:

E English, measured in 1/100 inches

M

G

Metric, measured in 1/10 mm

Graphic, measured in dots

Image length, from top to bottom, in selected units.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Image width, from left to right, in selected units.

For thermal transfer:

English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832

For thermal direct:

English

0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

Format name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.

{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"TEXTILES" p

Adds Format 1 (“TEXTILES”) to the printer. The image length is six inches and the width is four inches.

3-2 Defining Fields

D e f i n i n g Te x t F i e l d s

Create a separate definition for each text field. If text falls on two lines, each line of text requires a separate definition.

Syntax

T1. T

T2. field#

T3. # of char

T4. fix/var

T5. row

T,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column, gap,font,hgt mag,wid mag,color,alignment, char rot,field rot,sym set

p

Text Field.

Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field.

Maximum number of printed characters (0 to 2710) in the field.

Fixed or variable length field. Options:

F

Fixed length

V

Variable length

For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to the pivot point. The pivot point varies depending on how text is justified.

T6. column

T7. gap

For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to baseline of characters in field.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance from the left edge of the print area to the pivot point to find the column location.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

0 - 1080

Dots

0 - 864

Number of dots between characters 203 dpi.

Range: 0 to 99.

Note:

For monospaced fonts, the additional spacing is added to the existing inter-character gap.

This is also true for proportionally spaced fonts, but remember that the inter-character gap varies with character combinations.

Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your field width. Default spacing:

Reduced and Letter Gothic Bold 6 pt. 1 dot

HR2 and Letter Gothic Bold 9 pt.

2 dots

Standard, Bold, OCRA-like, and HR1

3 dots

All other fonts

varies with each letter

HR1 and HR2 are only used with the UPC bar code family and must be numeric.

Defining Fields 3-3

T8. font

T9. hgt mag

T10. wid mag

T11. color

Style of font. Options:

1

2

3

4

Standard

Reduced

Bold

OCRA-like

5

HR1

6

HR2

10

11

15*

16*

17*

18*

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface Bold 9 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 6 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 7 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 9 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 11 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 15 pt

50

EFF Swiss Bold (scalable)

* Available with version 2.0 or greater software.

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface Bold

1000

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

6.5 pt

8 pt

10 pt

12 pt

18 pt

22 pt

Letter Gothic Bold

1012

6 pt

CG Triumvirate ™

Typeface Bold Cond

1006

6.5 pt

1007

8 pt

1008

10 pt

1009

12 pt

1010

18 pt

1011

22 pt

1013

9 pt

Or a valid downloaded font selector number. Make sure the downloaded font is installed in the printer. Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only. Point sizes greater than 12 include only the following special characters: 0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr

ö¢£¥. All other point sizes use the whole symbol set. This information may not apply to optional fonts.

The CG Triumvirateä typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol

Sets. The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C, "Symbol

Sets/Code Pages" for more information.

Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for the scalable font - font 50 or downloaded

TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See Appendix B, “Fonts,” for more information about fonts.

Width magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for the scalable font - font 50 or downloaded TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter “W” for the widest field or an “L” for an average width field. Find your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B, “Fonts.”

Note:

To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.

There are two types of field color overlay attributes:

Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block out

(or “erase”) existing fields.

Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.

Options for standard printer fonts:

B

Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal

D/R/W

O

Opaque, Normal, White, Normal

Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal

Options for scalable fonts:

A/N

Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold

B/O

E/S

F/T


Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold

Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal

Line field blocked out by opaque field using attribute B

Line field not blocked out by transparent field using attribute O


Note:

Solid black print should not exceed 25% on a given square inch of the label, or the printhead life may be decreased.

Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.

T12. alignment

Options:

L

C

R

B

E

Align on left side of field.

Center text within field (monospaced fonts only)

Align on right side of field (monospaced fonts only)

Align at midpoint of field

Align at endpoint of the field

Use L, B, or E for any font.

T13. char rot

Character rotation. The field or supply does not rotate, only the characters do. Options:

0

Top of character points to top of field

1

2

3

Top of character points to left of field

Top of character points to bottom of field

Top of character points to right of field

T14. field rot

Note:

Font 50 and downloaded TrueType fonts do not support character rotation.

Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the characters. Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:

0

Top of field points to top of supply

1

2

3

Top of field points to left of supply

Top of field points to bottom of supply

Top of field points to right of supply

Defining Fields 3-5

T15. sym set

437

850

852

855

857

860

1250

1251

1252

1253

1254

1255

1256

1257

1258

Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set. For scalable or TrueTypeâ fonts, use:

1

ANSI Symbol Set

100

101

Macintosh

Wingdings

102

103

104

105

Unicode (user input) for particular mapping

BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping

GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping

SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping

106

107

Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)

GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping

Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)

BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping

Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)

DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)

DOS Code Page 850 (International)


DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)

DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)

DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)


Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)



Code Page 1254 (Turkish)

Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)


Code Page 1257 (Baltic)

Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)

Note:




Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded TrueTypeâ fonts or the scalable font. Symbol sets 102-107 require a downloaded International TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages," " for more information.

T,2,10,V,50,80,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

Example

Defines a text field (field #2) with a variable length of up to 10 characters. The field begins at row 50, column 80. There is no additional gap between characters, and the Standard font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is black on white and centered. No field or character rotation is used. The internal symbol set is used.


D e f i n i n g B a r C o d e F i e l d s

Each bar code field requires a separate definition.

Syntax

B1. B

B2. field#

B3. # of char

B,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column, font,density,height,text,alignment,field rot, type,sep_height,segment

p

Bar Code Field.

Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field.

Maximum number of characters. If the bar code uses a check digit, allow an extra character for the check digit. The actual maximum number of characters is limited by the size of the label and bar code density.

Range: 0 to 2710.

For the GS1 DataBar bar code, the maximum number of characters varies based on the specific

GS1 DataBar type.

Bar Code Type (B13)

1 - GS1 DataBar 14

2 - GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated

Maximum Number of Characters

13 - no check digit input


3 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked

4 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni directional

5 - GS1 DataBar Limited

6 - GS1 DataBar Expanded

7 - UPCA

8 - UPCE

9 - EAN13

10 - EAN8

11 - UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B

12 - UCC/EAN128 and CC C



*

*


*





* For more information, refer to the GS1 General Specification.

Notes: If not enough characters are entered, the bar code pads to the left with zeros. If too many characters are entered, unpredictable results may occur.

If FNC1 (function 1) is supported, use ~029 in the batch data to invoke it.

For Quick Response bar codes, this number includes header information. The maximum depends on the type of characters entered for the batch data and differs for the two models of the bar code.

Data Type

Numeric Data

Alphanumeric data

8-byte data

Kanji data

Model 1

1167

707

486

299

Model 2

2710

2710

2710

1817

Note:

The maximum number of characters depends on the selected level of error correction. As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters decreases.

Defining Fields 3-7

B4. fix/var

Fixed (F) or variable (V) length field.

Bar Code

UPCA

UPCA+2

UPCA+5

UPCA+Price CD

UPCE

UPCE+2

UPCE+5

EAN8

EAN8+2

EAN8+5

EAN13

EAN13+2

EAN13+5

EAN13+Price CD

POSTNET

Interleaved 2 of 5 or Interleaved

I 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar

Code 39 (w/ or w/o CD) or MOD43

Codabar (NW7)

Code 128

Code 16K

Code 93

MSI

PDF 417

Maxicode*

Data Matrix*

Quick Response*

Number of Characters

12

8

7

9

12

14

17

12

10

13

13

15

18

13

9 or 11

0 - 2710

0 - 2710

0 - 2710

0 - 2710

0 - 2710

0 - 2710

0 - 14

0 - 2710

0 to 93 (alphanumeric)

0 to 128 (numeric)

0 to 2335 (alphanumeric)

0 to 2710 (numeric)

1167 - 2710 (numeric)

707 - 2710 (alphanumeric)

0 - 13

Fixed or Variable

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F or V

F or V

F or V

F or V

V

V

F or V

F or V

F or V

V

V

GS1 DataBar

V

* For more information about MaxiCode, Data Matrix, Quick Response, and GS1Data Bar, see Appendix A, “Samples.”


B5. row

Distance from the bottom of the print area to the pivot point of the field. The pivot point varies, depending on how the field is justified. Pivot points:

Left/Center/Right-Justified Fields

B6. column

B7. font

B8. density

Balanced Fields End-Justified Fields

Remember to include text or numbers that may appear with the bar code for the row measurement.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot point.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

Allow a minimum of 1/10 inch between the scan edge of bar code and label edges or other data.

Bar code. Options:

1

2

3

4

UPCA

UPCE

Interleaved 2 of 5

21

22

23

Code 39 (no check digit) 31

5

6

Codabar

EAN8

32

33

7

8

9

10

EAN13

Code 128

MSI

UPCA +2

35

36

38

40

11

12

13

14

15

16

UPCA +5

UPCE +2

UPCE +5

EAN8 +2

EAN8 +5

EAN13 +2

41

44

50

17

EAN13 +5

LAC

POSTNET

Code 93

Code 16K

PDF417

MaxiCode

Data Matrix (ECC-200)

Quick Response

GS1 DataBar

Code 39 (MOD 43 check digit)

UPCA & Price CD

EAN13 & Price CD

Interleaved 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar

Bar code density. Use 0 for Quick Response bar codes. Use the following table for the other bar codes.

Defining Fields 3-9

UPCA +2/+5

Price CD

UPCE

+2/+5

EAN8

+2/+5

EAN13+2/+5

Price CD

Interleaved

2 of 5 or I2of5 with Barrier

Bar

2

4

2

4

2

4

2

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

(Code 39 or

MOD43

(Extended

Code 39)

Codabar

(NW7)

Code 128 or

Code 16K

7

8

9

10

11

12

7

8

9

4

5

2

3

4

6

8

20

13

6

7

11

12

20

3

4

1

2

B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s

Bar Code

Type

Density

Selector

Density

(% or cpi)

7.5

8.8

9.6

11.2

11.0

12.7

14.5

1.4

1.7

3.5

4.2

6.3

7.0

3.9

12.7

3.0

2.1

3.0

4.6

5.1

8.4

9.2

10.1

3.5/7.0

4.4/8.7

5.8/11.7

8.7/11.5

76%

114%

76%

114%

76%

114%

76%

114%

1.1

2.1

3.2

4.2

5.6

6.3

3/14.8

3/14.8

3/14.8

2/9.9

2/9.9

2/9.9

8/39.4

6/29.6

4/19.7

4/19.7

2/9.9

2/9.9

2/9.9

5/24.6

4/19.7

3/14.8

2/9.9

2/9.9

10/49.3

8/39.4

4/19.7

3/14.8

2/9.9

2/9.9

4/19.7

¼.9

5/24.6

Narrow

Element

(dots/mils)

2/9.9

3/14.8

2/9.9

3/14.8

2/9.9

3/14.8

2/9.9

3/14.8

21/103.4

12/59.1

7/34.5

6/29.6

4/19.7

4/19.7

Narrow to

Wide Ratio

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Data

Length

Appearance

Codes

Available

Char

Set

11 or 12

14/17

6 or 7

9/12

7 or 8

10/13

12 or 13

15/18

1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9

1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9

1, 5, 6,7 or 8

1, 5, 6,7 or 8

0 to 2710 8

0 to 9

0 to 9

0 to 9 1:3.0

1:2.5

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:3.0

1:2.3

1:2.0

1:3.0

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:2.0

1:2.5

1:2.5

1:2.5

1:3.0

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:2.0

1:3.0

1:2.2

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:2.5

1:2.0

1:3.0

1:2.5

1:2.0

N/A

0 to 2710

0 to 26

0 to 2710

8

8

8

SPACE

$%*+-./

0 to 9

A to Z

$+-./

0 to 9 a to d

00H to 7FH

Notes: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for

Code 39. Code 39, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar.

Values in bold indicate the default.


Bar Code

Type

CODE 93 3

4

5

7

10

MSI 4

5

7

Density

Selector

3.7

4.5

5.6

7.5

11.2

4.2

5.6

7.2

Density

(% or cpi)

Narrow

Element

(dots/mils)

Narrow to

Wide Ratio

N/A

Data

Length

0 to 2710 8

Appearance

Codes

Available

6/29.6

5/24.6

4/19.7

3/14.8

2/9.9

4/19.7

3/14.8

2/9.9

1:2.0

1:2.0

1:2.5

0 to 14 8

Char Set

00H to

7FH

0 to 9

POSTNET 0 (fixed at

4.3 cpi)

MaxiCode

7

24/118.2

N/A

10/49.3

N/A

4/19.7 (5 dot gap)

N/A

0,5,6,9 or

11

99

8

8

0 to 9

00H to

FFH

Bar Code

Type

PDF417

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

Density

Selector

Element

Width

(dot/mils)

2/9.8

2/9.8

2/9.8

3/14.8

3/14.8

3/14.8

4/19.7

4/19.7

4/19.7

Row Height

(dots/mils)

2/9.8

4/19.7

6/29.6

3/14.8

6/29.6

9/44.3

4/19.7

8/39.4

12/59.1

1:1

1:2

1:3

1:1

1:2

1:3

1:1

1:2

1:3

Aspect

Ratio

Data

Length

0 to 2709 8

Appearance

Codes

Available

Char Set

00H to

FFH

Note:

Values in bold indicate the default.

Bar Code Type

Quick Response

(QR Code) Models 1 and 2

Density

Selector

0

Data Length

Model 1: 0 - 1167 Numeric;0 - 707 Alphanumeric;

0 - 486 (8-bit); 0 - 299 (Kanji)

Model 2: 0 - 2710 Numeric, Alphanumeric and 8-bit;

0 - 1817 Kanji

Bar Code Type

GS1 DataBar

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

Density Selector Narrow Element

(dots/mils)

2/9.9

3/14.8

4/19.7

5/24.6

6/29.6

7/34.5

8/39.4

Data Length

0 to 2710

Char Set

00H to

FFH

Defining Fields 3-11

Bar Code

Data Matrix

Square symbols

Size

Row x Col.

10 x 10

12 x 12

14 x 14

16 x 16

18 x 18

20 x 20

22 x 22

24 x 24

26 x 26

32 x 32

36 x 36

40 x 40

44 x 44

48 x 48

52 x 52

64 x 64

72 x 72

80 x 80

88 x 88

96 x 96

104 x 104

120 x 120

132 x 132

144 x 144

Density

Selector

Max. Data Length

Num. X Alphanum.

App

Code

Char

Set

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

6 x 3

10 x 6

16 x 10

24 x 16

36 x 25

44 x 31

60 x 43

72 x 52

88 x 64

124 x 91

172 x 127

228 x 169

288 x 214

348 x 259

408 x 304

560 x 418

736 x 550

912 x 682

1152 x 862

1392 x 1042

1632 x 1222

2100 x 1573

2608 x 1954

2710 x 2335

8

0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)

00H to FFH

Bar Code

Data Matrix

Rectangular symbols

B9. height

Size

Row x Col.

8 x 18

8 x 32

12 x 26

12 x 36

16 x 36

16 x 48

Density

Selector

Max. Data Length

Num. X Alphanum.

App

Code

25

26

27

28

29

30

10 x 6

20 x 13

32 x 22

44 x 31

64 x 46

98 x 72

8

0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)

00H to FFH

Char

Set

Note:

The printers support printing a Data Matrix symbol with an X-dimension of 13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). If you use a denser bar code, make sure the bar code scans in your particular application. Our “premium” supplies and increasing the print contrast are recommended for denser bar codes. Depending on your application, additional densities are available.

Bar code height, in 1/100 inches, 1/10 mm, or dots. Minimum values:

English

20

Metric

Dots

51

41

POSTNET, PDF417, and MaxiCode bar codes have a fixed height.

Always use 0 for these bar codes.

Small Data Matrix and QR Codes may not be scannable. The Data Matrix and QR Code’s height depends on the number entered for this parameter. For example, if you select 80, the symbol could be smaller than 0.80," but it will not be greater than the amount specified in this parameter. The symbol arranges the data according to rows and columns within the specified height.

For the GS1 DataBar bar code, use the height only for UCC/EAN family types listed in B13.

For Quick Response bar codes, the value you enter is the symbol's maximum height. Small bar codes may not be scannable.


B10. text

Appearance of text with bar code. For UPC and EAN only use 0 to 7. For all others, use 8, except where noted. Options:

0

Default

MaxiCode Mode 0 (obsolete)

1

GS1 DataBar

QR Code Model 2

No check digit or number system

QR Code Model 1

2

3

5

MaxiCode Mode 2 (Numeric Postal Code)

QR Code Model 2

MaxiCode Mode 3 (Alphanumeric Postal Code)

Number system at bottom, no check digit

6

7

8

Check digit at bottom, no number system

Check digit and number system at bottom

No text, bar code only

GS1 DataBar

MaxiCode (autodetect modes 0, 2, or 3)

Data Matrix

B11. alignment

Choose L, R, C, B or E to align the bar code data correctly in the field. B centers variable width bar codes, which may not allow pad-character centering (Code 128, Code 39, etc.) E right justifies variable width bar codes. MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, and GS1 DataBar must use L.

B12. field rot


0

Top of field points to top of supply

1

2

3

(Use for Maxicode)

Top of field points to left of supply

Top of field points to bottom of supply

Top of field points to right of supply

B13. type

Note:

Serial bar codes printed at speeds greater than xx IPS may not scan properly.

Select from the bar code family. This parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar bar code. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. Options:

1

2

GS1 DataBar 14 (default)

GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated

5

6

3

4

GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked

GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni directional

GS1 DataBar Limited

GS1 DataBar Expanded

7

8

9

10

11

12

UPCA

UPCE

EAN13

EAN8

UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B

UCC/EAN128 and CC C

B14. sep_height

Height of the separator between the linear bar code and 2D bar code. This parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar bar code. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. The value is 1 or

2. The default is 1.

B15. segment

Width of the segment – only for use with GS1 DataBar family types listed in B13. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. The range is even numbers from 2 to 22. The default is 22.

Example

B,3,12,V,50,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 p

Defines a bar code field (field #3) with 12 characters of variable length starting at row 150, column 40. A UPCA bar code with a density of 2 and a height of 80 is used. The check digit and number system are shown at the bottom. The bar code is left aligned without any field rotation.

Example

B,1,30,V,5,5,38,4,0,0,L,0,1,2,22¦

Defines a bar code field (field #3) with up to 30 characters of variable length starting at row 5, column 5. The GS1 DataBar uses a density of 4. No text is shown with the bar code. The bar code is left-aligned with no field rotation.


D e f i n i n g C o n s t a n t Te x t F i e l d s

A constant text field is a set of fixed characters that prints on all labels. Define each constant text field separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). The characters in this field cannot be changed by batch data. Field options do not apply to constant text fields. Mark the pivot point of your field. This will vary, depending on how your field is justified.

Syntax

C,row,column,gap,font,hgt mag, wid mag,color,alignment,char rot, field rot,"fixed char",sym set

p

C1. C

C2. row

C3. column

Constant Text Field.

For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to the pivot point.

For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to baseline of characters in the field.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot point.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

0 - 1080

Dots

0 - 864

C4. gap

C5. font

Number of dots between characters 203 dpi. Range: 0 to 99.

Note:

For monospaced fonts, the additional spacing is added to the existing inter-character gap.

This is also true for proportionally spaced fonts, but remember that the inter-character gap varies with character combinations.

Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your field width. Default spacing:

Reduced and Letter Gothic Bold 6 pt. 1 dot

HR2 and Letter Gothic Bold 9 pt.

2 dots

Standard, Bold, OCRA-like, and HR1

3 dots

All other fonts

varies with each letter

HR1 and HR2 are only used with the UPC bar code family and must be numeric.

Style of font. Options:

1

2

3

4

Standard

Reduced

Bold

OCRA-like

5

HR1

6

HR2

10

11

15*

16*

17*

18*

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface Bold 9 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 6 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 7 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 9 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 11 pt

CG Triumvirate™

Typeface 15 pt

50

EFF Swiss Bold (scalable)


CG Triumvirate™

Typeface Bold

1000

6.5 pt

1001

8 pt

1002 10 pt

1003

12 pt

1004

18 pt

1005

22 pt

Letter Gothic Bold

1012

6 pt

CG Triumvirate

1007

1008

1009

1010

1011

1013

™

Typeface Bold Cond

1006

6.5 pt

8 pt

10 pt

12 pt

18 pt

22 pt

9 pt


C6. hgt mag

C7. wid mag

C8. color

C9. alignment

C10. char rot

C11. field rot

Or a valid downloaded font selector number. Make sure the downloaded font is installed in the printer. Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only. Point sizes greater than 12 include only the following special characters: 0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr ö¢£¥. All other point sizes use the whole symbol set. This information may not apply to optional fonts.

The CG Triumvirateä typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol

Sets. The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C, "Symbol

Sets/Code Pages" for more information.

Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for the scalable font - font 50 or downloaded

TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See Appendix B, "Fonts" for more information about fonts.

Width magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for the scalable font - font 50 or downloaded TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter “W” for the widest field or an “L” for an average width field. Find your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B, "Fonts."

There are two types of field color overlay attributes:

Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block out

(or “erase”) existing fields.

Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.

Options for standard printer fonts:

B


D/R/W

O

Opaque, Normal, White, Normal

Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal

Options for scalable fonts:

A/N

Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold

B/O

E/S

F/T


Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold

Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal

Note:

Solid black print should not exceed 25% on a given square inch of the label, or the printhead life may be decreased.

Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.

Alignment of constant text in the field. Options:

L

Align on left side of field.

C

R

Center text within field (for monospaced fonts only)

Align on right side of field (for monospaced fonts only)

B

E

Align at midpoint of field

Align at end of field.

Use L, B, or E for any font.

Character rotation. The field or supply does not rotate, only the characters do. Options:

0

Top of character points to top of field

1

2

3

Top of character points to left of field

Top of character points to bottom of field

Top of character points to right of field

Note:

Font 50 and downloaded TrueType fonts do not support character rotation.


0

Top of overlay points to top of supply

1

2

3

Top of overlay points to left of supply

Top of overlay points to bottom of supply

Top of overlay points to right of supply


C12. “fixed char” Fixed characters to appear in the field. Maximum 2710 characters. Enclose in quotation marks.

C13. sym set

Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set. For scalable or TrueTypeâ fonts, use:

1

ANSI Symbol Set

100

Macintosh

101

Wingdings

102

Unicode (user input) for particular mapping

103

BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping

104

GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping

105

SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping

Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)

106

GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping

Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)

107

BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping

Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)

437

DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)

850

DOS Code Page 850 (International)

852


855

DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)

857

DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)

860

DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)

1250


1251

Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)

1252


1253


1254

Code Page 1254 (Turkish)

1255

Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)

1256


1257

Code Page 1257 (Baltic)

1258

Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)

Note:




Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded TrueTypeâ fonts or the scalable font. Symbol sets 102-107 require a downloaded International TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages" for more information.

Example

C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 p

Defines a constant text field starting at row 30, column 10. It does not have any additional inter-character gap. The Standard font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is black on white and left justified. No field or character rotation is used. “MADE IN

USA” is printed in this field. The internal symbol set is used.


D e f i n i n g L i n e F i e l d s

Use lines to form borders and mark out original prices. Define each line separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). You can define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 25 percent of any given square inch of the label.

L i n e Ty p e s

You can create horizontal and vertical lines. There are two ways to define lines.

Segments

You choose the starting point and ending point.

Vectors

Syntax

You choose the starting point, the angle, and the length of the line.

L1. L

L2. type

L3. row

L,type,row,column,angle/end row,length/ end col,thickness,"pattern" p

Line Field.

Type of line. Only vertical and horizontal lines are supported. Options:

S

Segment. You choose the starting point and

V

ending point.

Vector. You choose the starting point, angle, and length.

Distance from bottom of print area to the starting point.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

L4. column

Distance from left edge of the print area to line origin.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

L5. angle

/end row

If Using Segments:

Row location of ending point. Measure from bottom of the print area. Ranges same as row above. On horizontal lines, this value must match item L3.

If Using Vectors:

Angle of line. Options: 0, 90, 180, or 270.


L6. length/ end col

L7. thickness

If Using Segments:

Column location of end point. Measure from left edge of print area. Ranges same as column above. On vertical lines, this value must match parameter L4.

If Using Vectors:

Length of the line in selected units.

Ranges for horizontal lines:


English

Metric

Dots

0 - 410

0 - 1040

0 - 832

Ranges for vertical lines:

English

0 - 1200

Metric

Dots

0 - 3048

0 - 2436


English 0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

Using the chart below for reference, write the line thickness

(1 to 99) in box L7. Line thickness fills upward on horizontal lines, or to the right on vertical lines.

Measured in dots.

L8. “pattern”

Example

Line pattern. Enter "".

L,S,110,30,110,150,10,"" p

Defines a horizontal line field as a segment starting at row 110, column 30 and ending at row

110, column 150. The line thickness is 10 dots.


D e f i n i n g B o x F i e l d s

Use boxes to form borders or highlight items of interest. Define each box field separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). You can define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 25 percent of any given square inch of the label.

Syntax

Q,row,column,end row,end col,thickness,"pattern"

p

Q1. Q

Q2. row

Q3. column

Box (Quadrilateral) Field.

Distance from bottom of print area to lower left corner of box.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance from left edge of print area to lower left corner of box.


English

Metric

Dots

0 - 410

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

0 - 1080

Dots

0 - 864

Q4. end row

Distance from bottom of print area to upper right corner of box. Ranges same as row.

Q5. end col

Distance from left edge of print area to upper right corner of box. Ranges same as column.

Q6. thickness

Using the chart below for reference, write the desired line thickness

(1 to 99) in box Q6. Boxes fill inward, so make sure your boxes do not overwrite other fields. Measured in dots.


Q7. “pattern”

Example

Line pattern. Enter "".

Q,40,30,70,150,3,"" p

Defines a box field starting at row 40, column 30. It ends at row 70, column 150. It has a thickness of 3 dots.


D E F I N I N G F I E L D O P T I O N S

4

This chapter provides a reference for defining

¨

¨ field options in formats check digit packets.

Note:

When using multiple options on the printer, options are processed in the order they are received.

A p p l y i n g F i e l d O p t i o n s

Field options further define text, bar code, and non-printable text fields. The text, constant text, or bar code field must be previously defined before you can apply any field option to it. Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.

C o m b i n i n g F i e l d O p t i o n s

You can use more than one option with most fields. For example, you can use Option 4 to copy data from another field, and then use Option 30 to pad the field. When you use multiple options for the same field, you must place the options in the order you want to apply them to your format.

R e s t r i c t i o n s

Some options cannot be used together. For example, incrementing (Option 60) and price field

(Option 42) options cannot be applied to the same field. Refer to the following sections addressing individual options for specific combinations to avoid.

Option 4 (copy a field) is the only option that can be repeated for a single field.

Example

R,1,3,1,3,1,1 p

Syntax

R,option#,parameter...parameter

p

R1. R

R2. option#

Indicates field option header.

Option number:

1

Define fixed characters

2

4

Data type restrictions

Copy data from previous field

30

31

42

50

Pad data to left or right with specified character

Generate check digit

Format as a price field

Define bar code densities

51

52

60

61

Define security and truncation of PDF417 bar codes

Define width or length of PDF417 bar codes

Define incrementing or decrementing field

Reimage fields

R3. parameter(s) Varies per option. See the following option descriptions.

Defining Field Options 4-1

O p t i o n 1 ( F i x e d D a t a )

Fixed data is information (a company name or store number) you want to print on all labels. You can define fixed characters for an entire field or for part of a field.

Syntax

R,1,"fixed char"

p

R1. R

R2. 1

R3. fixed char

Example

Option Header.

Option 1.

Characters to insert. Enclose in quotation marks. If you are defining fixed characters for part of a field, place underscores(_) in non-fixed positions. Any spaces in the phrase are fixed characters.

Range: 0 to 2710.

Note:

Underscore characters are stripped out and the data is compressed if no data is supplied by the batch and the field length is variable.

R,1,"_ _ _%$_ _ _ _ _" p

Uses fixed characters (%$) in positions 4 and 5. The other positions are variable.

Example

R,1,"MONARCH" p

“MONARCH” appears as a fixed field in this example.

To fill in the non-fixed portion of the field, see “Defining Batch Data Fields” in Chapter 6. As an alternative, you can apply Option 4 to copy data into the non-fixed character positions.

O p t i o n 2 ( D a t a Ty p e R e s t r i c t i o n s )

This option restricts the data type for a particular field. Use Option 2 only once per field.

If you do batch entry only in the batch packet, you do not need to apply Options 2 and 3. Use these options only for offline batch entry.

Syntax

R,2,char_code

p

R1. R

R2. 2

R3. char code

Example

Option Header.

Option 2.

Character type for the field. Options:

1

Numeric only (0..9)

2

3

Letters only (A..Z,a..z)

Symbols only (printable characters other than letters

4

5

6

or numbers)

Letters and numbers only

Numbers and symbols only

Letters and symbols only

Spaces are permitted in all categories. You can also use a combination of any two (letter, numbers, or symbols) character types.

Note:

A use for this option is a quantity field, where the operator could enter only numeric data.

R,2,2

p

Restricts the field data to letters only (A-Z or a-z).

4-2 Defining Field Options

O p t i o n 4 ( C o p y D a t a )

You can create a field that uses data from another field. This is useful for creating merged fields or sub-fields. You can copy the information from multiple fields into one field by applying the copy procedure more than once. Copy data is the only option you can apply to a field more than once.

The maximum number of characters defined in box T3 or B3 must allow for the number of characters you will place in the field, including any price, check digit, or fixed characters inserted by the printer. The maximum number of characters in the field into which data is copied cannot exceed 2710 or the maximum number of characters permitted by the bar code.

Note:

When copying from more than one field, copy into the destination field from left to right.

Syntax

R1. R

R2. 4

R3. src fld

R4. src start

R5. # to copy

R6. dest start

R7. copy code

Example

R,4,src fld,src start,# to copy,dest start, copy code

p

Field Option Header.

Option 4.

Field number from which data is copied. Range: 0 to 999.

Position number in the source field of the first character to be copied. Character positions are numbered 1 to 2710, starting from the left.

Number of characters to copy. Range: 1 to 2710.

Position number where copied characters are to begin printing in the destination field. Range: 1 to

2710.

Copy Method.

1

Copy field as is (including price symbols, pad characters, check digits, etc.).

2

Copy unformatted data (without price characters, pad characters, etc.).

R,4,3,1,3,1,1 p

Copies data from field #3, starting at the first position and copying three characters. In the destination field, the information is placed in position 1 and copied as formatted data.

1

2

3

4

5

M e r g i n g F i e l d s

You can copy data to merge the contents of fields. Use the copy data option as many times as necessary to copy all the appropriate fields into the merged field.

In the following example, two text and two non-printable fields are shown. Data from these fields is merged to form field 5, and is then printed as a bar code.

Field Data Field Type

203

339

8

BLUE

Non-printable

Non-printable

Text

Text

2033398BLUE Bar Code


To create this sequence:

1. Define fields 1, 2, 3, and 4.

2. Define field 5 as a bar code. Allow enough characters in the bar code field to hold all the copied characters.

3. Apply Option 4 to field 5 once for every source field.

S u b - F i e l d s

You can copy a segment of data from one field into a new location, called a sub-field. For example, extract part of the data in a bar code and display it in text form in a sub-field. Then, use the copy data option.

O p t i o n 3 0 ( P a d D a t a )

You can add characters to one side of a field to “pad” the field. Padding allows you to fill in the remaining spaces when the entered data does not fill an entire field. If a variable length field is not completely filled with batch data, this option fills the remaining positions in the field with the character designated by Option 30.

Syntax

R,30,L/R,"character"

p

R1. R

Option Header.

R2. 30

R3. L/R

Option 30.

Indicates type of padding:

L

Pad field on left side

R Pad field on right side

R4. “character”

Pad character must be within the 0 to 255 decimal range and enclosed inside quotation marks.

Note:

Do not use on fixed length fields.

Example

R,30,L,"X"

p

Pads data with an “X” on the left side of the field.

S a m p l e U s e f o r P a d d i n g

If you have a variable length bar code that you want to occupy a fixed amount of space on the supply, use pad characters. If the maximum number of characters in the bar code is 15, but the batch record only has 10 characters, the padding option fills the remainder of the field with pad characters.


O p t i o n 3 1 ( C a l c u l a t e C h e c k D i g i t )

The printer generates a check digit if you apply Option 31 to the field. You cannot use this option if the field contains a UPC, EAN, or Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit) bar code.

Syntax

R,31,gen/ver,check digit #

p

R1. R

R2. 31

R3. gen/ver

Option Header.

Option 31.

Enter G to generate a check digit.

R4. check digit # Specifies a check digit scheme. Enter a number that identifies a check digit scheme that has been defined. For more information, see “Using Check Digits.” Range: 1 to 10.

Example

R,31,G,5 p

Generates a check digit using the previously defined check digit scheme 5.

O p t i o n 4 2 ( P r i c e F i e l d )

You can apply options that will insert monetary symbols automatically. Do not use this option with Option 31 (define a check digit) or Option 60 (increment or decrement a field). This option is not recommended for bar codes. When determining the maximum number of characters, add the maximum number of digits and the monetary symbols.

Syntax

R,42,appearance code

p

R1. R

R2. 42

R3. appearance

code

Option Header.

Option 42.

Enter 1 to print price field in standard notation, as defined by country setting.

Use the monetary formatting packet to select monetary notations and symbols by country setting.

See “Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet” for more information.

See Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages" to make sure the monetary symbol you want to use is printable in the font selected for this field. For monetary symbols other than the dollar sign, use the internal symbol set.

Example

R,42,1 p

Uses a price field that prints the monetary symbol and notations as defined in the monetary formatting packet.


O p t i o n 5 0 ( B a r C o d e D e n s i t y )

You can apply this option to bar code fields when you want to create custom densities. When you apply this option, it overrides the density value in the bar code field. When using this option, set the density parameter in your bar code field to the default value. You can only use this option once for each bar code field.

Bar codes produced using Option 50 may not be scannable. The additional character gap, narrow space, and wide space parameters are valid only with Code 39 and Codabar. If these parameters are specified for any other bar codes, they will be ignored by the printer. Do not use

Option 50 with fixed density bar codes.

Option 50 can be used with PDF417 bar codes for specific customer ratios. With PDF417 bar codes, use only the narrow and wide parameters. The narrow parameter defines the individual bar width in dots and the wide parameter is used to define the height of each individual stacked bar code. Option 50 can also be used with Option 52 to further customize the dimensions of a

PDF417 bar code. Option 52 allows customization of the number of columns or number of rows for the bar code.

Syntax

R,50,narrow,wide,gap,nar_space,wide_space

p

R1. R

R2. 50

R3. narrow

R4. wide

Field Option Header.

Option 50.

Dot width of the narrow element. Range: 1 to 99.

Dot width of the wide element. Range: 1 to 99.

R5. gap

R6. nar_space

Additional dot space between characters. Enter a value of 1 to 99.

(Code 39 and Codabar only.)

Additional dot width of the narrow bar code space.

(Code 39 and Codabar only). Range: 1 to 99.

R7. wide_space

Additional dot width of the wide bar code space.

(Code 39 and Codabar only). Range: 1 to 99.

Example

R,50,4,8,4,4,8 p

Creates a custom bar code density with a narrow element of 4 dots, a wide element of 8 dots, a gap of 4 dots, 4 additional dot widths for the narrow bar code space, and 8 additional dot widths for the wide bar code space (if this is a Code 39 or Codabar bar code).


O p t i o n 5 1 ( P D F 4 1 7 S e c u r i t y / Tr u n c a t i o n )

You can define a security level and choose whether or not to truncate a PDF417 bar code.

Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the security level is high enough. You can use this option to create standard PDF417 bar codes or use the truncated option to create a narrower bar code.

This option can appear only once per PDF417 field, in any order, following the bar code field.

As the security level is increased, so is the size of your PDF417 bar code. For each level increased, the bar code will double in size.

Syntax

R,51,security,stand/default p

R1. R

R2. 51

R3. security

R4. stand/def

Example

Option Header.

Indicates Option 51.

Security level ranges from 0 to 8 (0 is the default).

Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the security level is high enough.

Truncation selector. Valid values:

S

(default) a standard PDF417 bar code

T

truncated

R,51,2,S p

Defines a security level of 2 for a standard PDF417 bar code.

O p t i o n 5 2 ( P D F 4 1 7 W i d t h / L e n g t h )

This option defines the image width or length of a PDF417 bar code. If you define a fixed number of columns (width), the bar code expands in length. If you define a fixed number of rows (length), the bar code expands in width.

Column value does not include start/stop or left/right indicator columns.

If this option does not immediately follow the PDF417 bar code field, the default settings are used. You can only use this option once per PDF417 bar code field.

Syntax

R,52,row/column,dimension

p

R1. R

Option Header.

R2. 52

Indicates Option 52.

R3. row/column

Indicates if you are defining the number of rows or columns.

R

Row

C

Column

If you specify rows, the bar code expands in columns, or vice versa.

R4. dimension

The number of rows or columns defined for the bar code.

The default is 4. Valid values:

3-90 for rows

1-30 for columns

Example

R,52,C,10 p

Defines the column width of 10, which expands the PDF417 bar code length by 10.


O p t i o n 6 0 ( I n c r e m e n t i n g / D e c r e m e n t i n g F i e l d s )

You may have an application, such as serial numbers, in which you need a numeric field to increment (increase in value) or decrement (decrease in value) on successive tickets within a single batch. Incrementing or decrementing can be applied to numeric data only. If you have a field that includes letters and digits, apply incrementing or decrementing to only the portion of the field that contains digits. Do not use with Option 42 (price field).

Syntax

R,60,I/D,amount,l pos,r pos

p

R1. R

R2. 60

R3. I/D

R4. amount

R5. l pos

R6. r pos

Example

Option Header.

Option 60.

Increment or decrement:

I

incrementing field

D

decrementing field

Amount to increase or decrease. Range: 0 to 999.

Leftmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not entered, the default value 1 is used.

Range: 0 to 2710.

Rightmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not used, the entire field length is used as the default. Range: 0 to 2710.

R,60,I,5,1,6 p

Increments a field by 5 each time the field is printed. The field increments beginning with the first left position and ending with the sixth position.

F i x i n g t h e F i r s t N u m b e r i n t h e I n c r e m e n t i n g S e q u e n c e

There are two ways to enter the first number in the incrementing sequence. You can use batch data or use Option 1 to define the first number as a fixed character. The first number in the sequence must contain the same amount of digits as the highest number to be counted. For example, to count the numbers 1 to 999, the first number in the sequence must be entered as

001.


O p t i o n 6 1 ( R e - i m a g e F i e l d )

This option redraws (reimages) a constant field when you have a constant field next to a variable field on your label. It can be used on text, constant text, bar code, line, or box fields.

These printers do not redraw an area if the field data does not change. When a field changes, that area is cleared and the new field data is imaged. However, the new field data may require a larger area than the previous field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change

(constant fields) may be covered with white space from the changing field’s (variable fields) area. Use this option to reimage the constant field, or it may appear broken.

Note:

The most common use for this option is with incrementing fields on your label, because they may cover a constant field.

Syntax

R1. R

R2. 61

Example

R,61 p

Option Header.

Option 61.

R,61

Reimages the constant field that appears next to a variable field.

Re-Image

ON

Re-Image

OFF

Re-Image ON Re-Image OFF

In the above example, Option 61 was applied to the bar code field to keep the incrementing field

(Box #) from blocking out the bar code field.


U s i n g C h e c k D i g i t s

Check digits are typically used to ensure that a text or bar code field scans correctly. If you apply Option 31, the printer calculates a check digit. A check digit scheme determines how the printer calculates a check digit. When you define a check digit scheme, you assign a number to identify it. This number is later entered in box R4 when you apply Option 31 to a field. You can use check digits with text or bar code fields. Check digit calculations are performed on numeric data only.

Do not use check digits with price fields. Do not define a check digit scheme for UPC, EAN,

Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit), and Code 93 bar codes, because they have predefined check digits.

Syntax

{A,selector,action,device,modulus, fld_length,D/P,"weights" p }

A1. A

A2. selector

A3. action

A4. device

A5. modulus

A6. fld_length

A7. D/P

A8. “weights”

Check Digit Header.

Assign a number from 1 to 10 to this check digit formula.

The action to perform. Enter A to add the check digit scheme.

Format storage device. Use R (Volatile RAM).

Number from 2 to 11. The modulus is used to divide the sum of products or the sum of digits.

The maximum number of characters the field will contain.

Range: 0 to 2710.

Algorithm. The algorithm determines how the check digit is calculated.

Options:

D

P

sum of digits sum of products

String of digits used for calculation. A weight string is a group of two or more numbers that is applied to a field. The number of digits in this string should equal the number in fld_length.

Enclose in quotation marks. Range: 0 to 2710.

Example

{A,1,A,R,10,5,P,"65432"

p }

Adds check digit scheme number 1 to the printer’s memory. The modulus is 10, the maximum number of characters in the field is 5. The check digit is calculated by using the Sum of

Products and the string of digits used in the calculation is “65432.”

S u m o f P r o d u c t s C a l c u l a t i o n

This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Products to calculate a check digit for this data:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

1. Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of

1,2,3,4:

field: weight string:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

2. Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:

field: weight string: products:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36


3. Next, the product of each digit is added together. This is the sum of the products.

20 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 16 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 36 = 98

4. Divide the sum of the products by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number.

The balance is called the remainder.

9

10 98

90

8

5. Subtract the remainder from the modulus.

The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check digit is 2.

10 - 8 = 2

S u m o f D i g i t s C a l c u l a t i o n

This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Digits to calculate a check digit for this data:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

1. Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of

1,2,3,4:

field: weight string:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

2. Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:

field: weight string: products:

5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9

4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36

3. Next, the digits of the products are added together. Two-digit products are treated as two separate digits.

This is the sum of the digits.

2 + 0 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 1 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 3 + 6 = 44

4. Divide the sum of the digits by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number. The balance is called the remainder.

4

10 44

40

4

5. Subtract the remainder from the modulus.

The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check digit is 6.

10 - 4 = 6



C R E A T I N G G R A P H I C S

This chapter provides information on how to

¨

¨

¨ map out the graphic image using the hexadecimal (hex) or run length method.

create a graphic packet using a graphic header, bitmap, duplicate, next-bitmap, text, constant text, line, and box fields.

place a graphic image into a format.

You can use graphic packets to create bitmapped images. To include a graphic packet within your format, your format must contain a graphic field. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format” for more information.

O v e r v i e w o f B i t m a p p e d I m a g e s

A printed image is formed through a series of dots. Each square on the grid below represents a dot on the printhead. The graphic image is created by blackening dots in a specific pattern. You can print varying shades of gray according to the concentration of dots on the image. When the dots are printed together, the end result is a graphic image.

5

D e t e r m i n i n g a M e t h o d

You can use one of two methods to map out your graphic image:

Hex Method

The dot sequences are segmented into binary numbers and then converted to hex numbers.

Run Length

Encoding Method

A graphic using gray-scaling, several slanted lines, or several vertical lines typically translates more efficiently with hex representation.

The dot sequences are segmented into black and white strings within a row. The total count of each white string is converted to a lower-case letter, corresponding to numeric value. The total count of each black string is converted to an uppercase letter, corresponding to numeric value. This method can reduce imaging time for graphics that contain repetitive rows of dots. A graphic with horizontal lines or very few white-to-black borders typically translates more efficiently with run length encoding.

The most efficient encoding method depends on how complicated your graphic image is and whether or not imaging time is a concern. You may want to experiment with both encoding methods to get optimal performance.

Creating Graphics 5-1

D e s i g n i n g B i t m a p p e d I m a g e s

Once you determine the encoding method to use, you can begin mapping out your graphic image.

Note:

The image that you map must be an upside down mirror image of the final result.

S p e c i a l C o n s i d e r a t i o n s

Solid black print cannot exceed 25% of any given square inch of the supply. If the black print exceeds this limit, you may lose data or damage the printhead.

In the first label, the large “M” logo and thick black line exceed the allowed black to white print ratio. In the second label, the large “M” logo does not exceed the black to white print ratio.

2 inches

2 inches

Exceeds

Limit

0.5" Does not exceed limit

0.5"

Exceeds

Limit

Does not exceed limit

5-2 Creating Graphics

U s i n g t h e H e x M e t h o d

The following steps explain how to derive a hex character string from a bitmapped graphic.

Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is OFF. A sequence of binary numbers, called a bit pattern or bitmap, determines what dots are on and off. The numbers “0" and ”1" are used for this purpose. The number “1" turns a dot on and ”0" turns a dot off.

All hex numbers must be two digits. For example, write hex 0 as 00, or hex E as 0E.

1. Assign 1 to every black square and 0 to every white square.

00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111000000000000000000000000001111111110000000000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001111110000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000011110000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000001111000000000

00000000000000000000000001111100001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111110000

00000000000000000000000110000011111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111000001100

00000000000000000000000110001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110

00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110

00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111000000000000000000011111111111111111111111111111110

00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111111111100

00000000000000000000000001111111100000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000011111111110000

00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000010000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000

00000011000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000

00000001111000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000

00000000111000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000

00000000111111000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000001111000000

00000000111111100000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110001111000000

2. Section off the grid in columns of eight. If any rows are not divisible by 8, add enough 0’s to complete a column.

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000111 11100000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000

00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100

00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100

00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000

00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000

3. One row at a time, convert each group of eight binary digits to hex.

starting at position 49 …

00111111 = 3F

11111111 = FF

11111111 = FF

11110000 = F0

4. Write the hex values for each row as a continuous string.

row 1, position 49 = 03FFFFFF00000

5. Repeat steps 3 through 4 for each row on the grid.

6. Insert the hex values in syntax format.


U s i n g t h e R u n L e n g t h E n c o d i n g M e t h o d

The following steps explain how to derive a run length character string from a bitmapped graphic.

Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is OFF.

Note:

The following example shows “1" to indicate when a square is ON, and ”0" to indicate when a square is OFF. You do not have to convert your dots when using the run length method.

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11000000 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000

00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100

00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110

00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100

00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000

00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000

00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000

00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000

00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000

00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000

1. Count the number of consecutive OFF or ON dots in a row. Write the number of consecutive dots in sequence for the first row on the grid. Write “ON” or “OFF” after each number to indicate ON or OFF dots.

(row 1, position 50) 26 on

(row 2, position 39) 11 on, 26 off, 9 on

(row 3, position 34) 5 on, 45 off, 6 on

2. Replace each number you have written with its corresponding code from the Dot to Run

Length Encoding Chart provided in Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/Code Pages.” Be sure to use

CAPITAL letters for black dots and lower-case letters for white dots.

26 on (Z)

11 on (K), 26 off (z), 9 on (I)

.

.

If the number is greater than 26, write z, followed by the letter corresponding to the amount over 26. For example, to represent 45 off dots, write zs.

5 on (E), 45 off (zs), 6 on (F)

.

.

3. Write the letter codes in sequence, uninterrupted, for each row.

(row 1,position 50) Z

(row 2,position 39) KzI

(row 3,position 34) EzsF

(row 4,position 30) DpZoD

.

.


Note:

If the end of the line specifies OFF dots (lower-case letters), the ending lower-case letters can be omitted. For example, uZFu can be written as uZF.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each row on the grid.

5. Insert the code values in syntax format.

D e t e r m i n i n g H o w t o S t o r e t h e I m a g e

Once you have mapped out your graphic image, determine how you want to store it. You have several options:

¨ Volatile RAM

¨ Temporary Storage

¨ Flash Memory

U s i n g Vo l a t i l e R A M

You should use RAM when the graphic image is used by several formats, because you only have to send the graphic image once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a format. Graphics smaller than approximately ½ inch by ½ inch can be stored in printer RAM and referenced by the graphic ID number.

Graphics are stored in the format buffer and remain there until another graphic packet is sent or the printer is turned off.

U s i n g Te m p o r a r y S t o r a g e

You should use temporary storage when the graphic image is used only in one format or your graphic image is very large. Graphic data in temporary storage is held in the image buffer until the graphic is printed and then it is cleared from memory. Temporary graphics are also cleared from memory when you send a new batch or update batch. You can use the same graphic image multiple times on a format. Send the graphic image to the printer after the format to which it applies.

If a graphic is stored in temporary storage, do not place a graphic field in the format. This causes an error. Instead, position the graphic image by using the row and column locations in the graphic packet header. Image memory (temporary storage) accepts a graphic packet 1218 rows long with 811 dots per row.

U s i n g F l a s h M e m o r y

You can use flash memory when the graphic image is used by several formats, because you only have to send the graphic image once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a format.


C r e a t i n g a G r a p h i c P a c k e t

Your graphic packet can contain

¨ bitmapped fields (for bitmapped images)

¨ constant text fields

¨ lines

¨ boxes.

Images using hex representation or run length encoding are bitmapped images. See “Designing

Bitmapped Images” to design your bitmapped image.

Once you design your graphic image, you are ready to define a graphic packet. This packet generates the graphic image you use in a format.

P o s i t i o n i n g t h e G r a p h i c I m a g e

This section explains how to position the graphic image within a graphic packet header, a field of a graphic packet, or within a format.

W i t h i n t h e G r a p h i c P a c k e t H e a d e r

When you are using RAM, the row and column parameters in the graphic header are usually 0,0, because placement is controlled by the graphic field in your format. This is especially true when designing a compliance label overlay.

When you are using temporary storage, these parameters control the placement of the graphic image on the supply.

The area enclosed within the dotted lines represents the graphic image starting at 0,0 (as defined in the graphic header).

If you want a fixed amount of white space around your graphic image, use something other than 0 for row and/or column.

The area enclosed within the dotted lines represents the graphic image starting at 0,0 with a fixed amount of white space (10,10) around the graphic image.

W i t h i n t h e F i e l d

In a bitmap, constant text, line, or box field, the row and column parameters control where an individual field or bitmapped row begins in relation to the coordinates defined in the graphic header.

The bottom of the triangle in this example represents the first field of the graphic packet starting at 10,0.


W i t h i n a F o r m a t

When you define the graphic field within your format, the row and

column parameters represent where on the format to place the graphic image.

If you are doing a compliance label, these numbers are usually 0,0, because your compliance label covers the entire supply. See

"Placing the Graphic in a Format," for a sample compliance label.

If you are placing a graphic (a logo, for example) within a certain area on your supply, enter the starting position (bottom left corner) of the graphic image.

This label shows the triangle “logo” beginning (the bottom left corner) at 155, 33 as defined in the graphic field.

D e f i n i n g t h e G r a p h i c H e a d e r

Every graphic packet must contain a graphic header. This is the first thing you enter. It identifies and provides important measurement and formatting information for the graphic.

Bitmap, duplicate, next-bitmap, constant text, line, and box fields follow the graphic header, if they are used.

Syntax

{G,graphID,action,device,units,row,col, mode,"name"

p

G1. G

G2. graphID

G3. action

G4. device

G5. units

G6. row

G7. column

G8. mode

G9. “name”

Graphic Header.

Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image.

The action to perform to the graphic. Options:

A Add the graphic to the printer.

C

Clear the graphic from the printer.

Graphic storage device. Options:

F

Flash memory

R

T

Volatile RAM (format must contain a graphic field)

Temporary storage

Note:

If you are using flash memory, send the graphic only once. Then, send only batches to reference it. If you re-send the graphic each time, it creates separate copies, and eventually fills up flash memory.

Unit of measure. For bitmapped graphics, G (dots) is the only valid option.

Distance between the bottom of the graphic image area and the first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space around the graphic image. See “Positioning the

Graphic Image,” for more information.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance between the left edge of the graphic image area and the left edge of first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space around the graphic image. See

“Positioning the Graphic Image,” for more information. Use the previous table for values.


English

Metric

Dots

0 - 410

0 - 1040

0 - 832

Imaging mode. Enter 0.


English 0 - 425

Metric

0 - 1080

Dots

0 - 864

Graphic name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.


Example

{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99Wire"

p

Adds a graphic image identified by number 99 to volatile RAM. The graphic uses dot measurement. The image will be placed according to the row and column parameters in the graphic field. The imaging mode is 0 and the image is called 99Wire.

C r e a t i n g B i t m a p F i e l d s

This defines one row of dots, starting at a specific row and column within the graphic image.

Each unique row of dots requires a bitmap field. A bitmap field can later be repeated by using a duplicate field.

Syntax

B,row,column,algorithm,"data"

p

B1. B

B2. row

B3. column

B4. algorithm

B5. data

Bitmap Field.

Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s bottom margin to the bitmap line.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s left edge to the bitmap line.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

Coding method for bitmap data:

H

Hex Representation

R

Run Length Encoding

Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any other character between the numbers. Range: 0 to 2710.

Example

{B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0"

p

Defines a bitmapped graphic field. The image begins 39 dots from the bottom and 56 dots from the left edge of the graphic area. Hex representation is used.


C r e a t i n g N e x t - B i t m a p F i e l d s

This field uses the previous field’s row and column locations. It allows you to use the bitmap or duplicate field data without having to recalculate row and column locations. This field represents one row of dots on the image.

Syntax

N,adjdir,adjamt,algorithm,"data"

p

N1. N

N2. adjdir

N3. adjamt

N4. algorithm

N5. “data”

Next-Bitmap Field.

Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before the current row.

0

Increments (inserts after)

1

Decrements (inserts before)

For example:

B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p

N,0,1,R,"DpZoD" p prints a next-bitmap field on row 51 at column 35.

Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Using 0 overwrites the same line. Range: 0 to 999.

Coding method for bitmap data:

H

Hex Representation

R

Run Length Encoding

Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any other character between the hex numbers or run length code letters. Range: 0 to 2710.

Example

B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0"

p

N,0,1,H,"000000E00000"

p

Defines a next-bitmap graphic field beginning on row 40. The row count increments by 1. Hex representation is used.

C r e a t i n g D u p l i c a t e F i e l d s

If a line of data is identical to a previous bitmap or next-bitmap field, the duplicate field allows you to repeat the dot sequence without retyping the data. A duplicate field represents one row of dots on the image.

Note:

Duplicate fields are useful when you have a graphic with a lot of repetition.

Syntax

D1. D

D2. adjdir

D3. adjamt

D4. count

Example

D,adjdir,adjamt,count

p

Duplicate Field.

Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before the current row.

0

Increments (inserts after)

1

Decrements (inserts before)

For example:

B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p

D,0,20,2 p inserts row 50 again at row 70 and row 90. Rows

70 and 90 do not have to be defined later.

Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Range for 203 dpi: 0 to 999; range for 300 dpi: 0 to 2699. The above example adjusts the duplicate field to image on row 70 and 90 (adding 20 to the current row count).

Number of times to duplicate the line. Range: 0 to 999.

B,117,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC"

p

D,0,1,2

p

Defines a duplicate field that is imaged after the bitmap line. This field duplicates the preceding bitmap line twice (at row 118 and 119).


You can use constant text, line, or box fields in a graphic packet to create a compliance label overlay. See Chapter 3, "Defining Fields," for more information about these fields.

S a m p l e H e x G r a p h i c P a c k e t

{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" p

B,39,48,H,"3FFFFFF0"

p

B,40,32,H,"01FFC000000FF8" p

B,41,32,H,"3E00000000000FC0" p

B,42,24,H,"03C0003FFFFFF0000F" p

B,43,24,H,"7C3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1F0" p

B,44,16,H,"0183FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF06" p

B,45,16,H,"018FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p

B,46,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p

B,47,16,H,"01FFFFFF80001FFFFFFFFE" p

B,48,16,H,"01FFFFF0000000007FFFFC" p

B,49,24,H,"7F800007FFFF00003FF0" p

B,50,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,51,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,52,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,53,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,70,0,H,"0400001FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p



B,73,0,H,"01000003FFF0000000007FFE" p

B,74,8,H,"FC001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE00C0" p

B,75,8,H,"FE00003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0C0" p

B,76,8,H,"1FF803FFF0000000007FFE"

p

B,77,8,H,"0FFFCFFC00000000000001C0" p

B,78,16,H,"FFDF000FFFFFFFFF8003C0" p

B,79,16,H,"7FFFC00007FFFF00001FC0" p


D,0,4,4 p


D,0,4,4 p

B,82,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p

D,0,4,3 p

B,83,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p

D,0,4,3 p

B,98,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0" p

B,99,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p

B,100,24,H,"1FF9FFFFFFFFFFFFFF" p

B,101,24,H,"3FFE0007FFFF8000FF80"

B,102,24,H,"391E0027FFFF803FFFC0"

B,103,24,H,"1C7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0"

B,104,24,H,"1FC1FFFFFFFFFFFF1FC0" p

B,105,24,H,"0FFDFFFFFFFFFFE0FF"

B,106,24,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8"

B,107,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0"

B,108,32,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFF" p

B,109,48,H,"07FFFF80" p

D,0,1,2 p

B,111,48,H,"FFFFFFFF" p p p p p p p


B,112,32,H,"FFFF00000000FFE0" p

B,113,24,H,"078000FFFFFFFF001F" p

B,114,24,H,"78FFFFFFFFFFFFFFE060" p

B,115,16,H,"0187FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC18" p

B,116,16,H,"027FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2" p

B,117,16,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p

D,0,1,2 p

B,120,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" p

B,121,24,H,"FEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" p

B,122,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p

B,123,32,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" p

B,124,32,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFF8" p }

S a m p l e R u n L e n g t h G r a p h i c P a c k e t

D,0,4,4

{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" p

B,39,50,R,"Z" p

B,40,39,R,"KzI" p

B,41,34,R,"EzsF" p

B,42,30,R,"DpZoD" p

B,43,25,R,"EdZZEdE" p

B,44,23,R,"BeZZMeB" p

B,45,23,R,"BcZZW" p

B,46,23,R,"ZZZA" p

B,47,23,R,"ZDsZE" p

B,48,24,"TzkU" p

B,49,25,"HtRqJ" p

B,50,27,"GsSsG" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,51,27,"ChZWgC" p

D,0,4,4 p

B,52,34,R,"ZZEdC"

D,0,4,4 p p

B,53,30,R,"NzkN"

D,0,4,4 p p

B,70,5,R,"AuGsSsG" p

B,71,5,R,"BtChZWgC" p

B,72,6,R,"DxZZEdC" p

B,73,7,R,"CtNzkN" p

B,74,8,R,"FmChZWhC" p

B,75,8,R,"GsZZEdC"

B,76,11,R,"JiNzkN" p p

B,77,12,R,"NbJzzeC" p

B,78,16,R,"JaElZKmD"

B,79,17,R,"QsSsG" p p

B,80,27,R,"ChZWgC"

D,0,4,4 p p

B,81,34,R,"ZZEdC"

D,0,4,4 p p

B,82,30,R,"NzkN" p p

B,83,27,R,"GsSsG" p p

B,98,30,R,"ZZJ"

B,99,29,R,"ZZM" p p

B,100,27,R,"JbZZE"

B,101,26,R,"MnToI" p p


B,102,26,R,"CbHnTiP" p

B,103,27,R,"CcZZC" p

B,104,27,R,"GeZWcG" p

B,105,28,R,"JaZReH" p

B,106,32,R,"ZZI" p

B,107,34,R,"ZZE" p

B,108,38,R,"ZQ" p

B,109,53,R,"T" p

D,0,1,2 p

B,111,48,R,"ZF" p

B,112,33,R,"PzfK" p

B,113,29,R,"CpZBoE" p

B,114,25,R,"DcZZGfB" p

B,115,23,R,"BdZZMeB" p

B,116,22,R,"AbZZVbA" p

B,117,22,R,"ZZZB"

D,0,1,2 p p

B,120,23,R,"ZZZ"

B,121,25,R,"ZZV" p p

B,122,29,R,"ZZM"

B,123,32,R,"ZZF"

B,124,39,R,"ZT" p p p }

P l a c i n g t h e G r a p h i c i n a F o r m a t

To include a graphic within a format:

1. Design the graphic image as shown in “Designing Bitmapped Images.”

2. If you are using RAM, place a graphic field in the format file to reference the graphic. See the following section, “Defining the Graphic Field,” for more information.

Note:

If you are using temporary storage, you do not need a graphic field in your format to reference the graphic image.

3. Download all the necessary packets (check digit, format, etc.).

4. Send the graphic file to the printer, if you have not already done so. See “Creating a

Graphic Packet” for more information.


D e f i n i n g t h e G r a p h i c F i e l d

The graphic field in a format references the graphic image by the graphID in the graphic header.

This field is required only if the graphic will be stored in RAM.

Syntax

G,graphID,row,col,mode,rotation

p

G1. G

G2. graphID

G3. row

G4. column

G5. mode

G6. rotation

Example

Graphic Field.

Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image.

Distance between the bottom of the print area on the supply to the bottom of the graphic image.

Measured in selected units.

English

Metric

Dots

0 - 1200

0 - 3048

0 - 2436

The row specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the row value above to determine the actual position in the format.

Distance between the left edge of the print area on the supply and the left edge of the graphic.

Measured in selected units. The column specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the col value above to determine the actual position in the format.


English

0 - 410

Metric

Dots

0 - 1040

0 - 832


English 0 - 425

Metric

Dots

0 - 1080

0 - 864

Imaging mode. Enter 0.

The orientation of the graphic on the supply. Enter 0.

G,57,0,0,0,0

p

Defines a graphic field that is identified by the number 57. The image begins at 0,0. The imaging mode is 0 and there is no rotation.

S a m p l e B i t m a p G r a p h i c I m a g e

The following format shows the graphic packets (hex and run length) in a sample format.

{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"FMT2" p

G,99,227,35,0,0 p

Q,240,15,300,125,10," " p

T,1,5,V,285,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,2,5,V,255,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,3,15,V,180,25,0,10,1,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,4,15,V,121,35,0,1,3,1,B,L,0,0,0 p

L,S,94,15,94,235,10,"" p

B,5,12,F,50,65,1,2,40,1,L,0 p }

Sample Batch Packet

{B,2,N,1

p

1,"Pat’s" p

2,"Parts" p

3,"3/8 inch Wire" p

4,"3.55/8 Pack" p

5,"345911871209" p }



P R I N T I N G

This chapter describes how to

¨

¨

¨

¨ download files to the printer define the batch header, batch control, and batch data files modify formats create DOS batch files.

Turn on the printer and make sure it is ready to receive data before you download.

See your host’s documentation, system administrator, or “Downloading Methods” for information on ways to download.

When downloading, send your packets in this order:

1. Configuration packets (A-M)

2. Any of the following:

¨ Check digit packets (see Chapter 4)

¨ Format packets (see Chapter 3)

¨ Graphic packets (see Chapter 5)

3. Batch data (see “Defining the Batch Header”)

D o w n l o a d i n g F i l e s

To download from a PC:

1. Check that the PC and the printer are connected.

2. Check that communications have been established between the PC and the printer.

3. Send the communication settings packet to select the printer ’s communication settings. See “Defining the Communication Settings Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information (only used for serial communication). If you change the printer’s communication settings, make sure they match those at the host before sending any packets to the printer.

4. Type this command at the DOS prompt:

COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1

Transmits a file called “LABEL1.FMT” to COM1.

COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1

Transmits a batch called “LABEL1.BCH” to COM1.

If you use the COPY command to download your formats, set flow control to DTR

(not XON/XOFF). Also, do not use the MS-DOS prompt from inside Windows, because you receive a framing error.

6

Printing 6-1

D e f i n i n g t h e B a t c h H e a d e r

Batch data is the actual information printed on the supply. Batch data fills in the format’s text, bar code, and non-printable text fields.

A batch packet contains the following three parts:

batch header

identifies the format and how many labels to print.

batch control

defines the print job.

batch data

(optional)

defines the actual information printed on the label.

A batch header begins the file. It tells which format the batch uses and how many labels to print. To record batch data, make a copy of the worksheet in Appendix D, “Format Design

Tools.”

Syntax

{B,format#,N/U,quantity

p

B1. B

B2. format#

B3. N/U

B4. quantity

Batch Header.

Format number (1 to 999) to use.

Controls how image is generated.

N

New (default). Erase image and re-image all fields using

U

online data. Any missing fields will be blank.

Update last image with one or more fields.

All other fields remain the same as the last queued batch.

Quantity to print (0 to 999). Using 0 pre-images the field to reduce the imaging time for labels. See

“Batch Quantity Zero Method” for more information.

Example

{B,1,N,1 p

Defines a batch header that uses format #1 and reimages all fields using the online data. One label is printed with this batch.

D e f i n i n g t h e B a t c h C o n t r o l F i e l d

The batch header must precede this field. The batch control field defines the print job and

applies only to the batch that immediately follows.

Syntax

E,feed_mode,batch_sep,print_mult,multi_part p

E1. E

Batch Control Field.

E2. feed_mode

Feed Mode. Options:

0

Continuous Feed (default)

1

On-Demand

E3. batch_sep

E4. print_mult

E5. multi_part

Batch Separator. Use 0 (no separator).

Number of tags (1 to 999) with the same image. 0 is the default.

Number of identical parts on one tag (1 to 5). 0 is the default.

Example

E,0,0,0,0 p

Defines a batch control field. Continuous feed mode is used and no separator prints between batches. The print multiple and multi-part supply are set to 0 (not used).

6-2 Printing

D e f i n i n g B a t c h D a t a F i e l d s

Batch data fields should be sent in field number order. Use continuation fields for large amounts of data. If you are using N (New) in the batch header, you must list all fields with your data in sequence. If you are using U, you need to list only those fields and data that changes from the last printed batch.

Syntax

field#,"data string"

p

C,"continuation"

p

field#

“data string”

C

“continuation”

Identifies the text, bar code, or non-printable text field in which to insert the following data. Range:

1 to 999.

Provides the actual information to appear in fields. Enclose in quotation marks. Length: 0 to 2710 characters.

Identifies information to be appended to the data string. This parameter is optional.

Provides the actual information to be added to the batch packet. Enclose in quotation marks. Use this option to break up longer fields.

Length: 0 to 2710 characters. This parameter is optional.

Example

1,"Size 12"

p

2,""

p

3,"Blue"

p

C,"and this would be appended."

p

Defines a batch data field. “Size 12" prints in field #1, a blank line appears in field #2, ”Blue and this would be appended" prints in field #3.

U s i n g S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s i n B a t c h D a t a

There are two ways to specify special characters in batch data:

¨ Place a tilde (~) before each character

¨ Use a tilde with the decimal ASCII equivalent

For example, you can use “” or ~034 to print the “ character in your batch data; otherwise, the tilde characters are ignored. You can also use ~XXX where XXX is the decimal equivalent of an unprintable character.

S a m p l e B a t c h D a t a w i t h S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s

{B,1,N,1

p

1,"123~034456789"

p

2,"~094983~’126LG4451"

p

Decimal Character

~034 is “

~094 is ^

~126 is ~

What Prints

123"456789

^983~’LG4451

M e r g e d o r S u b - F i e l d s

If a field is completely filled by data copied from other fields, use quotation marks without spaces between them for the "data string" parameter.

I n c r e m e n t i n g F i e l d s

In incrementing fields, the first number in the sequence must contain the same number of digits as the highest number to be counted. For example, to increment the numbers in a field from 1 to 999, enter the starting number in the batch as 001.

Printing 6-3

D o w n l o a d i n g M e t h o d s

You can download the format and batch data using one of three methods: sequential, batch, and batch quantity zero.

S e q u e n t i a l M e t h o d

Using the sequential method, you send all your format and batch data at one time. Use this method when your application does not require operator intervention to input data. All data is sent down at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as the last field is imaged, your labels begin to print.

Example

{Format}

{Batch Packet}

B a t c h M e t h o d

This is similar to the sequential method, but it is used when you want to send multiple batches.

All data for the first batch is sent at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as the last field for the first batch is imaged, labels begin to print. This process is repeated for each subsequent batch.

Example

{Format}

{Batch Packet}

{Batch Packet}

B a t c h Q u a n t i t y Z e r o M e t h o d

You may use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention to enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data for the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and the label prints almost immediately.

To use the batch quantity zero method:

1. Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity). This ensures the label is properly positioned.

The printer images constant text, line, and box fields, but does not print them.

2. Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (batch update) and a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field, but does not print it.

At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from other fields.

3. Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.

4. For the last field, input data and send a batch header with the quantity of labels you want printed. When the printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels.

See “Reducing Imaging Time” in Chapter 9 for an example using the batch quantity zero method.

6-4 Printing

M o d i f y i n g F o r m a t s

The optional entry method is a quick way to modify your format fields, check digit fields and configuration packets.

O p t i o n a l E n t r y M e t h o d

This method enables you to reset only the parameters you want to change. Commas act as placeholders for unchanged parameters. The optional entry method reduces file size and increases the speed at which files are sent to the printer.

C r e a t i n g D O S B a t c h F i l e s f o r D o w n l o a d i n g

If you are downloading from an MS-DOS system, you can create batch files to set communication values and download formats. It is a good idea to create a subdirectory to hold your format files.

Here is a DOS batch file that sets a serial port, changes to a subdirectory, and downloads a check digit file, format file, and batch data file.

MODE COM1: 9600,N,8,1,P

CD\PAXAR

COPY LABEL1.CDS COM1

COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1

COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1

Refer to your DOS manual for more information on creating batch files.

Printing 6-5

6-6 Printing

S T A T U S P O L L I N G

This chapter explains how to use status polling.

There are two types of Status Polling:

¨

¨

Inquiry Request—information about the readiness of the printer.

Job Request—information about the current (or last received) job downloaded to the printer.

I n q u i r y R e q u e s t ( E N Q )

An ENQ character acts as a request for printer status information. You can send an

ENQ in front of, in the middle of, or immediately following any packet downloaded to the printer. An ENQ is a command that can be executed as part of a packet or sent on its own (using a communications program). An ENQ is processed immediately. The

ENQ character is user defined.

The ENQ character does not appear as a visible character; however, we are representing the ENQ character as

E .

I n q u i r y R e s p o n s e

Printer status is returned to the host in a 3-byte (3-character) sequence. The first byte is the non-printable user-defined ENQ character, which is not visible on the response.

The second and third bytes are printer status codes. See the ENQ Reference Tables for the meaning of bytes 2 and 3.

Example:

E AB

The status codes (A and B in this case) are ASCII equivalents to the hexadecimal bits that represent the various types of status responses. This response indicates that the printer is online (Character A) and that there is a stock fault (Character B).

Example:

E ??

Indicates that this is the first ENQ response since the printer was turned on. Send another ENQ immediately to receive the printer’s status.

Example:

E @@

Indicates the printer is offline.

7

Status Polling 7-1

The following graphics can be used as a quick reference for the Status of Byte #2 and Byte #3.

Byte #1 is the non-printable user-defined ENQ character.

7-2 Status Polling

V

W

X

Y

S

T

U

O

P

Q

R

L

M

N

_

`

]

^

Z

[

\

I

J

K

E

F

G

H

@

A

B

C

D

E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 2

The following table describes the ENQ response.

Char Const.

OFF

Const.

ON

Comp.

Failure

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 7

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 6

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 5

0

0

0

0

0

0

Corr.

Error

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 4

0

0

0

0

0

0

Online

Data

Error

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

Bit 3

0

0

0

0

0

0

Busy

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

Bit 2

0

0

1

1

0

0

Active Online

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

Bit 1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

Bit 0

0

1

0

1

0

1

Note:

A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.

Status Polling 7-3

E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 2 ( c o n t i n u e d )


Char Const.

OFF

Const.

ON

Comp.

Failure

Corr.

Error

Busy Active Online

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 4

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 5

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 6

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 7

0

0

0

0

0

0

x y z v w t u q r s o p m n j k l g h

I e f c d a b

{

|

}

~

Dec 127

Note:


0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

Bit 0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

Bit 2

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

Bit 1

0

1

1

0

0

1

Online

Data

Error

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

Bit 3

0

0

0

0

0

0


E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 3


Char Const.

OFF

Const.

ON

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 6

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 7

0

0

0

0

U

V

W

R

S

T

N

O

P

Q

K

L

M

]

\

^

_

`

Z

[

X

Y

I

J

G

H

D

E

F

@

A

B

C

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 5

0

0

0

0

Low

Batter

Format

Error

Waiting to

Dispense

Label

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

Bit 3

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 4

0

0

0

0

Ribbon

Fault

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

Bit 2

0

0

0

0

Stock

Fault

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

Bit 1

0

0

1

1

Note:


Online

Error

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

Bit 0

0

1

0

1

Status Polling 7-5

E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 3 ( c o n t i n u e d )


Char v w x y s t u p q r n o l m z

{

|

}

~

Dec 127 j

I k g h e f a b c d

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 7

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 6

1

1

1

1

1

Const.

OFF

Const.

ON

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Bit 5

1

1

1

1

1

Low

Battery

Format

Error

Waiting to

Dispense

Label

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

Bit 3

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Bit 4

0

0

0

0

0

Ribbon

Fault

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

Bit 2

0

1

1

0

0

Stock

Fault

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

Bit 1

0

0

0

1

1

Note:


Online

Error

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

Bit 0

1

0

1

0

1


J o b R e q u e s t

A Job Request returns status information about the most recently processed print job. You can send a job request after an ENQ or batch. You can send two levels of Job Requests:

¨ Numeric Error Codes Only (0, 1, or 2)

¨ Verbose (3 or 4)

Syntax

{J,#}

Field Type

Identifier request#

Valid Options

J

2

3

4

0

1

Description

Job Status Request

Returns ASCII coded strings or numeric error codes

Returns error number

Returns number of labels printed in batch

Example

{J,3}

The job response may not be immediate. If the printer has an error (out of supplies, ribbon problem, etc.), or has insufficient memory, correct the problem and then resend the job request.

If the problem is not corrected, no response is returned. If a formatting error has occurred, the job request returns the status. The printer must first interpret the format and batch data before returning the response.

Note:

You may need to press A under F (feed) before the job response is returned.

To clear an error, press A under E (escape). An ENQ can clear errors numbered less than

500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another job request until the error is resolved.

J o b R e s p o n s e

The Job Response varies, depending on the type of request sent to the printer. The following syntax is the response for a Job 0, 1,or 2 request.

Syntax

{J,Status1,Status2,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}

Status1

Status2

These errors stop the print job. Examples include out of stock, supply faults, or data formatting errors. These errors are numbered less than 24 on the “Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table,” later in this chapter.

These are errors in the syntax of the MPCL data stream. Printing does not stop, but the information may not print properly. These errors are numbered greater than 24 on the “Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table,” later in this chapter.

FMT-1/BCH-2

The format or batch number is returned.

Here is an example of a response returned to a J 0, 1, 2 request:

{J,8,0,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}

Indicates that a portion of the format extends off the tag in format 1, batch 2. Refer to the “Job

Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table” later in this chapter for brief explanations for J, 0, 1, 2 requests.

In the above example, refer to error 8 for an explanation.

Status Polling 7-7

The following syntax is the response for a Job 3 request. You may need to press A under F

(feed) before the job response is returned.

Syntax

{J,"Status1 A,B","Status2

A,B,C,D,E","FMT-1","BCH-2"}

“Status1 A,B”

Status1 A contains the field number, in the format or batch, where an error was found. If the error is not in the format or batch, a “0" is returned.

Status1 B contains an error number, which represents the actual printer error. The error numbers can be found in Chapter 8, ”Diagnostics and

Errors."

Example

{J,"2,612",}

2 is the field number where an error was found. 612 is the error number, indicating that data is missing or does not match the format definition for that field.

Note:

Error numbers found in Status1 B, always have a value equal to or greater than 500.

These are considered very serious errors.

“Status2 A,B,C,D,E” contains the packet type, field type, field number, parameter, and error number.

Status2

A- Packet Type

represents the MPCLII packet that the error occurred on. The packet could be Format (F), Batch (B), Check Digit (A), Graphic (G), or Font (W).

Status2

B- Field Type

represents the MPCLII field that the error occurred on. If the packet has no fields, Status2 A is replicated. If the error occurs before the field is identified a question mark is sent. Since the batch data is variable, a D is sent to indicate data.

Status2

C- Field Number

Status2

D- Parameter

represents the field number within each packet. The packet header is the first field and each subsequent field is indicated by the field separator.

represents the parameter within the field that the error occurred. The numbering begins after the field identifier.

Status2

E- Error Number

is the error that coincides with the error numbers presented in Chapter 8,

“Diagnostics and Errors.”

“FMT-1/BCH-2"


Note:

If more than one error occurred, only the most serious error is acknowledged.

{J,"","F,B,4,6,33","FMT-1","BCH-2"}

Indicates that an error occurred on a bar code (B) field within a format (F) packet. The bar code field is the fourth (4) field in the packet. The error occurred in the sixth (6) parameter of the field. Error number 33 means the bar code density is invalid.

To clear an error, press A under E (escape). An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than 500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another job request until the error is resolved.


The following syntax is the response for a Job 4 request.

Syntax

{J,printed,total,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}

printed total

the number of tags or labels already printed in the batch.

the total number of tags or labels to be printed in the current batch.

“FMT-1/BCH-2"

Example


{J,8,25,"FMT-3","Bch-2"}

8 out of 25 tags or labels have been printed from format number 3.

Use a Job Request 4 when printing in the on-demand mode with a large number of tags or labels from a single batch. A Job Request 4 may not be accurate if tags or labels are printed in continuous mode, because of the response time involved. A Job Request 4 is not useful in single ticket batches (printing 1 of 1) or multiple single ticket batches.

Note:

A batch has to be printing when you send the job request. You cannot use this job request on batches printing formats with incrementing fields.

J o b S t a t u s 0 , 1 , 2 R e s p o n s e Ta b l e ( S t a t u s 1 C o d e s )

Number

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

21

23

24

8

9

6

7

10

11

12

2

4

5

0

1

Meaning

No error

Stacker fault

Supply problem

Hot printhead

Printhead open

Insufficient memory

Ribbon problem

Field ## extends off tag

Field ## has a bad font/bar code

Field ## contains invalid data

Field ## has a graphic missing

Invalid communication channel

Invalid file type

All communication channels are busy

Receive overrun error

Receive parity error

Receive framing error

Receive buffer full

Label waiting

Bad dots (verifier detected a failure)

Low battery

Memory configuration packet error

Status Polling 7-9

Numbers 25 through 50 are not currently in use.

J o b S t a t u s 0 , 1 , 2 R e s p o n s e Ta b l e ( S t a t u s 2 C o d e s )

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

61

62

63

64

65

Number

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

81

82

83

84

73

74

75

80

Meaning

Invalid command

Invalid separator value

Graphic not found

Format for batch not found

Quantity/Multiples out-of-range

Name descriptor too long

Invalid cut value

Invalid number-of-parts value

Invalid orientation value

Invalid thickness value

Invalid text field

Invalid bar code field

Data string too long

Invalid data field

Row greater than stock length

Row greater than format length

Column greater than printhead width

Column greater than format width

Invalid label length

Invalid label width

Invalid increment/decrement value

Identifier out-of-range

No field to create format

Stop location of a line is out of range

Syntax error

Can’t use offline format for online batch

Can’t queue graphic batch

Can’t store online format

Can’t queue online batch

Can’t queue online clear command


D I A G N O S T I C S A N D E R R O R S

This chapter explains how to

¨

¨

¨ print test labels reset the printer call Technical Support.

Before you call Service, print a test label. The label contains information to help diagnose mechanical and setup problems.

This chapter also provides explanations of your printer’s errors. The errors are classified by type and are listed in order. If you have trouble loading supplies or performing maintenance, refer to the Equipment Manual.

Some errors numbered 400-438 and 500-574 are internal software errors. Errors numbered 703-758 are supply errors. Follow the directions provided with the error description to correct the problem. Errors numbered 900-999 are Hard Printer

Failures. If you cannot clear an error, turn off the printer, wait several seconds and then turn on the printer. Call Technical Support if you receive any error message not listed in this chapter.

To clear an error, press A under E (escape). If a formatting error occurs, the label prints; but data may be missing. Correct the format or batch and resend them to the printer.

P r i n t i n g a Te s t L a b e l

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Press A under P. You see the Pause screen.

3. Press A under T to enter the menu.

4. Press A under e to select Tools.

5. Press A under the corresponding number to enter the following default password:

1, 1, 1, 3, 1.

6. Press A under e to select Diagnostics.

7. Select Printer, Test Label, and Diag Label.

The test labels print. The first label shows the model number and the printer’s configuration by packet (A-M). See Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for more information.

The second label shows the software version, communication settings, speed, contrast, gap sensor setting, label length, and total number of inches printed.

8

Diagnostics and Errors 8-1

R e a d i n g a Te s t L a b e l

The first test label shows the model number, software version, and the printer’s configuration by packet. See Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer” for more information about the printer’s configuration.

The second test label shows the software version, total number of inches printed, voltage, print contrast, printhead resistance, number of bad dots, and memory. In the example above:

¨ The printer has printed 119 inches of regular supplies.

¨ The printer has printed no linerless (high-energy) supplies.

¨ The battery voltage is 15.79.

¨ CONTRAST POT does not apply.

¨ No options are set.

R e s e t t i n g P r i n t e r s

Sometimes the printer receives mixed signals and loses its ability to communicate. If this happens, reset the printer and attempt communication again. To reset the printer, turn off the printer, wait 15 seconds, and turn it back on.

When you turn off the printer, all the information set through the online configuration packets

(A-M) is saved. See the sections in Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for more information about each packet.

I f Yo u R e c e i v e a n E r r o r M e s s a g e

Any time you receive a message that is not described in this manual, or the recommended action does not solve the problem, call Technical Support. Some errors are the result of communication problems. In this case, reset your printer and reboot your computer. If you change any of the online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so the configuration changes take effect.

I f t h e P C a n d P r i n t e r A r e N o t C o m m u n i c a t i n g

If your PC is having trouble communicating with your printer, follow these steps:

¨ Check any messages that occur at the printer and at the PC. See the following error message listing in this chapter for more information.

¨ Make sure you are using the correct printer cable.

¨ Make sure the cable is plugged into the correct port on the computer.

¨ Compare your printer’s communications settings (especially flow control) with the settings on your PC. Your printer and PC communications should match. Print a test label to identify the printer’s communication settings.

¨ Make sure the printer is online (ready to receive data).

If all of the above are correct, reset your printer. Try the function again. If you still can not establish communications, call Technical Support.

8-2 Diagnostics and Errors

C a l l i n g Te c h n i c a l S u p p o r t

Technical support representatives are available Monday through Friday during regular business hours. Follow these steps before you call:

1. Make sure your PC and printer are properly connected.

2. Record any error messages that occurred.

3. Recreate the problem, if you can.

4. Check your port settings. Your problem may be corrected simply by changing the communication settings.

5. List any changes that have recently been made to the system. Try to record what you were doing when the problem occurred.

6. Reset your printer. For information on resetting your printer, see "Resetting Printers."

7. Reboot your computer. Refer to your computer documentation for specific instructions.

8. Print a test label, see “Printing a Test Label” for more information.

Have the following information ready before you call: computer brand name and model, version of DOS, printer model, other peripheral devices on your system, support agreement, contract number, or invoice information, customer number, and printer serial number.

A d d i t i o n a l D i a g n o s t i c s I n f o r m a t i o n

For detailed printer diagnostics information, refer to the Equipment Manual. See Chapter 7,

“Status Polling,” for information on requesting printer and job status. See the following error message listing in this chapter for more information.

D a t a E r r o r s

Errors 001 to 499 are data errors. These errors are returned in response to a J,3 request. See

Chapter 7, “Status Polling,” for more information. A data error indicates that incorrect data was received from the host, causing the printer to ignore the entire print job. After checking the packet and correcting the problem, transmit the print job again.

The following is a list of data errors. These errors occur because data in the format, batch, check digit, font, or graphic packet is invalid.

F o r m a t E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

001

Packet ID number must be 1 to 999.

002

Name must be 1 to 8 characters (excluding non-printable control characters) inside quotes.

003

004

005

Action must be A (add) or C (clear).

Supply length is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for valid lengths.

Supply width is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for valid widths.


006

007

010

011

012

013

014

016

017

018

020

021

022

023

024

025

030

015

Storage device must be F (Flash), R (volatile SRAM), or T (temporary for graphics).

Unit of measure must be E (English), M (Metric), or G (Dots). See “Defining the

Format Header” in Chapter 3 for more information.

Field ID number is outside the range 0 to 999.

Field length exceeds 2710.

Row field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension. See “Defining Text

Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid row lengths.

Column field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension. See “Defining

Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid column widths.

Font style must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 18, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1011, 1012, 1013, or 50. See

“Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 or Appendix B, “Fonts,” for more information.

Character rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree),

2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree). See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

Field rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree), 2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree).

See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

Field restriction must be V (variable) or F (fixed).

Code page/symbol set selection defined in the field must be 0 (Internal), 1 (ANSI),

100, (Macintosh), 101 (Wingdings),

102 (Unicode), 103 (BIG5 for Unicode), 104 (GB2312 for Unicode), 105 (SJIS for

Unicode), 106 (GB2312), 107 (BIG5),

437 (DOS Page 437), 850 (DOS Page 850), 852 (Latin 2),

855 (Russian), 857 (Turkish), 860 (Portuguese), 1250 (Latin 2), 1251 (Cyrillic), 1252

(Latin 1), 1253 (Greek), 1254 (Turkish),

1255 (Hebrew), 1256 (Arabic), 1257 (Baltic), or 1258 (Vietnamese). See “Defining

Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

Vertical magnification must be 1 to 7 for standard printer fonts or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.

Horizontal magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.

Color must be A, B, D, E, F, N, O, R, S, T, or W. See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter

3 for more information.

Intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots.

Field justification must be B (balanced), C (centered), E (end),

L (left), or R (right). See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

String length is outside the range 0 to 2710.

Bar code height must be at least 20 (English), 51 (Metric), 41 (Dots), or is not within the supply dimensions.


040

041

042

043

031

032

033

034

035

036

044

045

046

051

6

7

8

1

5

Human readable option must be

0

default no CD or NS

NS at bottom, no CD

CD at bottom, no NS

CD and NS at bottom no text

Bar code type is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid options.

Bar code density is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for the bar code density chart.

GS1 DataBar bar code symbol type is invalid. The range is 1 to 12. See “Defining

Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

GS1 DataBar bar code separator height must be 1 or 2. See “Defining Bar Code

Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

GS1 DataBar bar code segment width is invalid. The range is 2 to 22. See “Defining

Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.

Line thickness must be 0 to 99 dots.

Line direction must be 0, 90, 180, or 270.

End row is invalid. Line segment or box end row is defined outside of printable area.

End column is invalid. Line segment or box end column is defined outside of printable area.

Dot pattern for line or box must be “”.

Line length is defined beyond the maximum length. See “Defining Line Fields” in

Chapter 3 for valid lengths.

Line type must be S (segment) or V (vector).

Imaging mode in the graphic header must be 0.

102

104

105

106

107

B a t c h E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

101 The format referenced by batch is not in memory.

Print quantity is outside the range 0 to 32,000.

Batch mode must be N (new) or U (update).

Batch separator in a batch control field must be 0 (Off).

Print multiple is outside the range 1 to 32,000.

Cut multiple is outside the range 0 to 999. Only valid for printers with a knife.


108

109

Multiple part supply is outside the range 1 to 5.

Cut type is outside the range 0 to 5. Only valid for printers with a knife.

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

201

202

203

204

205

206

O p t i o n E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

200 Option number must be 1, 2, 4, 30, 31, 42, 50, 51, 52, 60, or 61.

207

208

209

210

211

212

Copy length is outside the range 0 to 2710.

Copy start position must be 1 to 2710.

Destination start position must be 1 to 2710.

Source field must be 0 to 999.

Copy type must be 1 (copy after rules) or 2 (copy before rules).

Increment/Decrement selection must be I (increment) or

D (decrement).

Incrementing start position must be 0 to 2710.

Incrementing end position must be 0 to 2710.

The incrementing amount must be 0 to 999.

Security value for a PDF-417 bar code must be 0 to 8. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.

Narrow element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.

Wide element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.

Dimension must be 1 to 30 for a column or 3 to 90 for a row on a PDF417 bar code.

Truncation code must be S (standard) or T (truncated bar code).

Aspect code must be C (columns) or R (rows).

Option definition must be S (set) or T (template).

Input device must be D (Default), H (Host), K (Keyboard), N (None), or S (Scanner).

Pad direction must be L (from left) or R (from right).

Pad character is outside the range 0 to 255.

Check digit selection must be G to generate check digit.

Primary or secondary price format is outside the range 1 to 16.

Data type restriction is outside the range of 1 to 6.


223

224

Option is not valid for the field.

Bar code intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots. (This is also known as the additional character gap when using Option 50, Defining Bar Code Densities.)

O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

251 Power up mode must be 0 (online).

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

Language selection must be

0 (English), 1 (French), 2 (German), or 3 (Spanish-ES),

Batch separator must be 0 (off).

Slash zero selection must be

0 (standard zero) or 1 (slash zero).

Supply type must be 0 (black mark), 1 (die cut), or

2 (continuous/non-indexed).

Ribbon selection must be 0 (thermal direct) or 1 (thermal transfer).

Feed mode must be 0 (continuous) or 1 (on-demand).

Supply position must be -10 to 99 dots.

Contrast adjustment must be -390 to 156 dots.

Print adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots.

Margin adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots.

Speed adjustment must be 0 (default), 20 (2.0 ips), 30 (3.0 ips), or 40 (4.0 ips).

Primary monetary symbol must be 0 (None), 1 (Dollar), 2 (Pound), 3 (Yen), 4

(Deutsche Mark), 5 (Franc), 6 (Peseta), 7 (Lira), 8 (Krona), 9 (Markka), 10 (Schilling),

11 (Rupee), 12 (Ruble), 13 (Won), 14 (Baht), 15 (Yuan), or 16 (Eurodollar).

Secondary symbol selection must be 0 (none) or 1 (print secondary sign).

Monetary decimal places must be 0 to 3.

Character string length in the control characters packet must be 5 (MPCL control characters) or 7 (ENQ/IMD command character).

267

268

269

270

Baud rate selection must be 0 (1200), 1 (2400), 2 (4800), 3 (9600), 4 (19200), or 5

(38400). Resend the communication settings packet.

Word length selection must be 0 (7 bits), or 1 (8 bits). Resend the communication settings packet.

Stop bits selection must be 0 (1 bit), or 1 (2 bits). Resend the communication settings packet.

Parity selection must be 0 (none), 1 (odd), or 2 (even). Resend the communication settings packet.


271

272

282

283

284

285

286

287

290

291

292

Flow control selection must be 0 (none), 1 (DTR), 2 (CTS/RTS), or 3 (XON/XOFF).

Resend the communication settings packet.

Symbol set (code page) in the System Setup packet must be

0 (Internal), 1 (ANSI), 2 (DOS 437), 3 (DOS 850), 4 (1250- Latin 2), 5 (1251- Cyrillic),

6 (1252- Latin 1), 7 (1253- Greek), 8 (1254- Turkish), 9 (1255- Hebrew), 10 (1256-

Arabic), 11 (1257- Baltic), 12 (1258- Vietnamese), 13 (852- Latin 2), 14 (855-

Russian), 15 (857- IBM Turkish), 16 (860- DOS Portuguese), 17 (Wingdings), 18

(Macintosh), 19 (Unicode), 20 (BIG5), 21 (GB2312), 22 (SJIS to SJIS - Code Page

932), 23 (GB2312 to GB2312 - Code Page 936), or 24 (BIG5 to BIG5 - Code Page

950).

RS232 Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.

ENQ Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.

The buffer type must be D (Downloadable Fonts), F (Format), I (Image), R (Receive),

T (Transmit), or V (Scalable Fonts).

The storage device type in the memory configuration packet must be F (flash) or R

(volatile RAM).

The buffer size is invalid.

The printhead width must be 0.

Action must be 0 (disable) or 1 (enable) for the backfeed control packet or the printer is active.

Dispense position must be 50 to 200 dots, or the printer is active.

Backfeed distance must be 10 to 200 dots, or the printer is active. The backfeed distance can not be greater than the dispense position.

C h e c k D i g i t E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

310 Check digit scheme number must be 1 to 10.

Modulus must be 2 to11.

311

314

Check digit algorithm must be D (sum of digits) or P (sum of products).


400

402

403

404

340

350

351

352

380

G r a p h i c E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

325 Duplicating direction must be 0 (insert after) or 1 (insert before) in duplicate fields for graphics.

327

Amount of row adjustment must be 0 to 999 dots in duplicate fields for graphics.

328

Duplicate count must be 0 to 999.

405

406

Bitmap line encoding must be H (hex) or R (run length).

Font selector must be 1 to 9999.

Font data length must be 68 to 16384.

Insufficient font memory is available for the downloaded font.

Job request is outside the range 0 to 4.

The character immediately following { is invalid.

Field separator is not in the expected location.

Field separator was not found.

The number (greater than five digits/732,000), string (greater than 2710), or tilde sequence (greater than 255) currently being processed is out of range.

Too many fields exist in the format. You cannot have more than 200 fields in the format. Lines, boxes, and constant text fields count as fields.

Parser error. Format or graphic is already in use. Make sure your packet not missing p or {} characters.

C o m m u n i c a t i o n E r r o r s

Error

Code

Description

409

410

411

The printer memory is full. Delete unnecessary formats or graphics from memory. If you are using a graphic file that is very large, consider using another mapping method

(such as run length encoding) to reduce the required memory.

Parity on the printer does not match the parity on the host. Check the parity setting under SETUP options.

Framing error. The printer cannot communicate with the host. Make sure the host is turned on, communication cables are connected correctly, port settings are correct, and communications are active. Check the baud rate, word length, and stop bits to make sure they match those at the host. Do not toggle between Microsoftâ

Windowsâ and MS-DOS while using the COPY command, or you will receive a framing error. Exit Windows before using the COPY command. Re-transmit the data.


428

429

433

497

499

413

414

415

420

421

422

423

424

425

426

427

412 There is a problem with flow control between the printer and the host. Make sure the printer and the host flow control settings match (both are DTR or both are

XON/XOFF). If the error persists, call Technical Support.

Online receive buffer is full. Check your printer’s XON/XOFF or DTR SETUP values to be sure there is not a flow control problem.

The internal keyboard buffer is full or you need a new keypad. Call Technical Support.

The buffer size you defined exceeds the total available in your machine.

Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.


Duplicate internal name. Call Technical Support.

Internal software error. Call Technical Support.




Format name is invalid. Valid name is 1 to 8 characters inside quotes or "" for a printer-assigned name. Press A under F (feed) and try to continue. If the error reappears, call Technical Support.

Batch name is invalid or graphic not found. Press A under

F (feed) and try to continue. If the error reappears, call Technical Support.

A field number appears more than once in a format.

The batch references a field number that does not exist in the format.

An error occurred during the loop back test on the parallel port. Call Service. Only valid for printers with a parallel port.

An error occurred during the loop back test on the serial port. Call Service.


D a t a F o r m a t t i n g F a i l u r e s

Formatting errors indicate that a field will print incorrectly. After you have checked the data stream and corrected the data, retransmit the format and batch.

Note:

For errors 571-622, the batch still prints, but the field, font, bar code, or density may be incomplete, missing or contain incorrect data.

Description Error

Code

571

572

573

574

575

600

601

603

611

612

613

614

615

616

618

619

UPC or EAN bar code data length is invalid. The bar code data length in the batch does not fit the format.

A copy field, padded field, or incrementing field length is invalid. The field length in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks. Or, the fixed length field does not contain the specified number of characters.

Price field length is invalid. The price field length in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.

No CD scheme or room for CD. The CD scheme in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.

The graphic included in your format could not be found. Resend the graphic packet.

If the error persists, call Technical Support.

The printer could not image the batch, because the batch was refused. Call Technical

Support.

An error occurred while the batch was imaging. Resend the format, batch, font, and/or any graphic packets. If the error persists, call Technical Support.

The batch was not found while imaging. Resend the batch packet. If the error persists, call Technical Support.

Font, bar code or density is invalid. The font, bar code or density in the batch does not fit the format.

The data in this line of the batch is either missing or does not match the format.

Reference point off tag.

Portion of field off tag. There may be an invalid character in the packet. Make sure you did not enter O for Ø.

Bar code width is greater than 16 inches or the number of keywords for your PDF 417 bar code exceeds 928. Decrease the density or shorten the amount of data to print the bar code.

A bad dot falls on a bar code and the dot cannot be shifted. A gray box is printed instead of the bar code.

Magnification must be 1 to 7 for standard printer fonts or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.

The JIS (16-bit) code for Kanji is invalid.


620

621

622

Font and printhead dot density mismatch. A 300 dpi font is specified in the format, but a 203 dpi printhead is used in the printer or vice-versa. Check the font or change the printhead to correct the error. Only valid for printers with a 300 dpi printhead.

An error occurred opening the TrueType font file. Select a different font to download.

If the error message persists, call Technical Support.

Not enough memory to create the downloaded TrueType characters in the scalable

(vector) fonts buffer. Reconfigure the printer’s memory and increase the scalable

(vector) fonts buffer. Resend the font, format, and batch packet after reconfiguring the memory. If the error message persists, call Technical Support.

710

711

712

713

714

730

750

M a c h i n e F a u l t s

These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer.

Error

Code

Description

703

704

The printer sensed a calibration of different-sized black marks. Make sure the correct supply is loaded.

Printer has not sensed a supply mark within the specified number of inches or out of supplies.

Check the

¨

¨

¨

¨ supply tracking supply marks black mark sensor position supply roll for binding.

If the error continues to appear, change the supply.

Band out of data. Call Technical Support.

UART receiving communication error (framing, parity, etc.). Call Technical Support.

Receiving failure or command overrun error. Call Technical Support.

Receiving failure or illegal command. Call Technical Support.

Receiving failure or undefined command. Call Technical Support.

A memory allocation error occurred during initialization.

Printhead is overheated. Turn off the printer to let the printhead cool. If the error persists, call Technical Support.


756

757

758

752

753

754

755

751

769

770

771

781

782

790

762

763

766

767

768

Printer did not sense a black mark when expected. The supply may be jammed. For errors 751-753, check the

¨

¨

¨

¨ supply tracking supply marks black mark sensor position supply roll for binding.

If the error continues to appear, change the supply

Printer sensed a mark in the wrong place.

Printer sensed a mark that is too long.

Printer has a ribbon problem. Check the ribbon for a jam or remove any slack by turning the take-up reel clockwise. Load a new ribbon.

Printhead is open. Close the printhead before continuing. If the error persists, call

Technical Support.

The printer is out of supplies. Load supplies.

Load supplies. The calibrated supply length differs by plus or minus .25 inches from the format. Press A under F (feed) to print on the current supply or load new supply.

Check supply. Either the supply is not seen, or the on-demand sensor is broken

(purchase optional). Check for a label jam. Clear the supply path or reload supplies.

This error may occur if you remove a label too quickly in on-demand mode. The printer does not recalibrate after this error.

Low battery. Recharge the battery.

Waiting to dispense label. Press A under F (feed).

Backfeed error. There is a problem with the backfeed or overfeed distance.

Incorrect AD value. Call Technical Support.

Printhead has more than 10 bad dots within the format area or is not connected.

Make sure the printhead is connected.

The printhead is not receiving enough volts. Call Technical Support.

The print motor is not ready. Call Technical Support.

The format specified by the application was not found. Reload your application and format, and try again. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.

The voltage is too low. Call Technical Support.

The voltage is too high. Call Technical Support.

The printer is busy. Wait until the printer is idle (no batch waiting to print or not receiving data) before you send any packets. This error may occur when you try to print a test label if the printer is busy. Turn off the printer. Wait two seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.


791

792

793

794

795

The printer has an error pending. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.

The printer is not initialized. Call Technical Support.

The printer job queue is full. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.

The backfeed mode is not set.

Print engine lock-up. Call Technical Support.

802

803

810

811

812

F l a s h M e m o r y E r r o r s

These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer's flash memory.

Error

Code

Description

800

801

A directory in flash memory is full. Delete unused files in flash to free memory.

Flash memory is full. Delete unused files in flash to free memory.

813

820

821

822

823

824

A directory in flash memory cannot be found. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

There is no directory in flash memory. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

A file in flash memory is not open. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

A file in flash memory is already open. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

The file being written to flash memory does not fit. Delete unused files in flash to free memory.

An attempt to delete a flash directory or firmware file was made, but access is denied.

This is a firmware error. Call Service.

An error occurred while writing flash memory. This is a flash hardware/component or firmware error. Call Service.

An error occurred while erasing flash memory. This is a flash hardware/component or firmware error. Call Service.

The flash chip is improperly initialized. This is a flash hardware/component or firmware error. Call Service.

The flash chip is locked, preventing reading and writing. This is a hardware/component or firmware error. Call Service.

Flash erase or write voltage is too low, unable to the complete operation. This is a flash hardware/component error. Call Service.


R a d i o E r r o r s

These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer's radio.

Error

Code

Description

830 No radio. No radio is installed in the printer or the radio did not initialize. This is hardware error. Call Service.

831

832

833

834

Radio data error/invalid data. The data format from the radio card is invalid. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

Radio checksum error/invalid or missing data. The data length from the radio card is invalid. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

Radio communication error. The internal serial port has a hardware failure. Call

Service.

Radio acknowledgment error. The radio did not acknowledge the packet. This is a firmware error. Call Service.

O p t i o n a l M i c r o S D C a r d E r r o r s

These errors occur when there is a problem with the optional micro SD card (if installed).

Error

Code

Description

860

861

There is an error opening a font file on the optional micro SD card. Call Service.

There is an error writing to a file on optional micro SD card. Call Service.

862 There is an invalid condition for the optional micro SD card. Call Service.

901

902

903

904

905

906

907

H a r d P r i n t e r F a i l u r e E r r o r s

These errors are hard printer failures. Call Technical Support if you receive these messages.

Error

Code

Description

900 RAM test failure.

ROM/EPROM checksum failure.

Software timer failure.

Software interrupt failure.

No memory for native layer.

Illegal interrupt.

Non-maskable interrupt. Check format packet for font clear or format clear packets.

Low RAM error.


908

909

910

911

Non Volatile RAM checksum failure.

RAM corrupted.

Warm restart.

Version string mismatch.


P R I N T E R O P T I M I Z A T I O N

This chapter provides information on how to improve your printer’s performance by

¨

¨

¨ adjusting the print quality reducing the imaging time for printing providing general tips and hints for designing formats.

This printer uses “smart imaging” to image and print fields on supplies. Smart imaging remembers the exact boundaries and locations of each field and places a boundary box (white space) around each field. When a field changes that particular boundary box is cleared and the new field data is imaged. However, the new field data may require a larger boundary box than the previous field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change may be covered with white space from the changing field’s boundary box. To prevent existing fields from being covered by a changing field, see

“Option 61 (Reimage Field)” in Chapter 4.

A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t Q u a l i t y

Many factors affect print quality: type of supplies, print speed, print contrast, and the type of printer’s application. This printer supports both thermal transfer and thermal direct supplies. The type of supply should match the printer’s application.

¨

¨

¨

If you want to print at high speeds, you should use premium supplies. Using premium supplies reduces smudged images, hard to read labels, and faded print. Supply type, print speed, and print contrast work together to improve the print quality of labels. Contact your Sales Representative for more information.

Select the print speed based on desired throughput and print quality. If print quality is more important, reduce the print speed, because a lower print speed increases the print quality of labels. If throughput is more important, increase the print speed to give you the needed print performance. See “Increasing

Throughput” for more information.

If the print quality is too light or too dark, adjust the print contrast. The correct contrast setting is important because it effects how well your bar codes scan and how long the printhead lasts.

9

Printer Optimization 9-1

Be sure to check the print quality of bar codes with a bar code verifier or scanner. If you do not have a verifier or scanner, check the bar code visually. A bar code that is IN SPEC has complete bars and clear spaces. Small alphanumeric characters look complete. A bar code that is IN SPEC may not look as good as one that is too dark, but it does have the highest scan rate.

Dark

IN SPEC Light

Note:

For highest scan rates, make sure there is adequate white space before and after the bar code. Also, a darker bar code does not mean it will scan better.

R e d u c i n g I m a g i n g T i m e

Imaging time is the time it takes the printer to image the data for the first label after the printer receives the format and batch packet. There are several ways to reduce the imaging time: send formats and configurations once, use a batch quantity of zero, or update batch fields.

¨ If the formats use the same check digit scheme, you only need to send the check digit scheme once.

¨ Send formats once and use the batch update field to change information on the label. Using a batch update field reduces the imaging time, because only the fields that change are imaged. All other fields remain the same as the last queued batch.

¨ Use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention to enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data for the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and the label prints almost immediately.

To pre-image a label:

1. Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity).

Example

{B,1,N,0 p }

The printer images constant text, line, box, and graphic fields, but does not print them.

2. Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (update) and a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field, but does not print it.

Example

{B,1,U,0 p

1,"RODGER DIST CTR" p }

{B,1,U,0 p

2,"8292" p }

At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from other fields.

9-2 Printer Optimization

3. Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.

{B,1,U,0 p

3,"BROADWAY" p }

{B,1,U,0 p

4,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p }

4. For the last field, input data and send it with the quantity of labels you want printed. When the printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels.

Example

{B,1,U,10 p

5,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }

I n c r e a s i n g T h r o u g h p u t

Reducing the imaging time increases throughput. You can also increase the baud rate to increase the transmission time and increase throughput. Make sure the communication settings at the printer match those at the host. Using a baud rate of 19200 is almost twice as fast as

9600 baud. Using a baud rate of 38400 is almost twice as fast as 19200 baud.

G e n e r a l F o r m a t T i p s a n d H i n t s

The following tips and hints are helpful to keep in mind when designing MPCLII formats.

W i t h P a c k e t s

¨ Leave parameters blank that you do not need to change when sending online configuration packets. For example, { I,A,,,,1 p } prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online system setup parameters.

You can group fields with similar parameters. For example

T,1,10,V,250,50,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 p

T,2,15,,,75 p

T,3,,,,100 p

The first text field sets all the parameters for that field. The second text field’s number of characters and column location changes from what was defined in the first field. In the third text field, only the column location is changed. This method can be used on bar code and constant text fields as well.

Note:

You should understand the basics of each field before using this method.

After you modify any fields or parameters with the optional entry method, resend the format, batch, or configuration packet to the printer.

W i t h B a r C o d e s

¨ Be careful when rotating or placing a UPC/EAN bar code with human readable characters, because the bottom reference point is at the bottom of the bars, not at the bottom of the human readable characters.

W i t h F i e l d s

¨ Data that remains the same for each label should be in a constant text field. Data that varies for each label should be in a text field.

¨ Check for trailing spaces in text or constant text fields if you receive a “field off tag” error.

An easy way to see trailing spaces is to print the field in the reverse font.

¨ Make sure if you magnify a field, it does not go off the label or cover another field.

Magnifying a field increases the distance between the printed character and the edge of the cell.

Printer Optimization 9-3

9-4 Printer Optimization

S A M P L E S

This appendix contains sample formats. You can customize any of these formats to meet your needs.

S a m p l e U P C A F o r m a t P a c k e t

{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt 25" p

C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT" p

B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 p

T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0 p }


{B,25,N,1 p

1,"02802811111" p

2,"TEXT FIELD" p }

A

Samples A-1

0

1

2

3

S a m p l e M a x i C o d e P a c k e t s

MaxiCode is a two-dimensional bar code developed by UPS (United Parcel Service, Inc.). Data must be defined in a specific way for UPS. Refer to the Guide to Bar Coding with UPS or the

AIM MaxiCode Specification for more details about data requirements.

The printer supports modes 0, 1, 2, and 3. Contact us for information about additional

MaxiCode modes.

Mode Description

Obsolete

Obsolete

Structured Message

Structured Message

You can select which mode to use in the bar code field or allow the printer to auto-select the mode (0, 2, or 3) based on your data. See “Defining a Bar Code Field” for more information.

MaxiCode automatically pads data with the “!” character.

Note:

MaxiCode does not support the NULL character.

Modes 2 and 3 are defined by the way the postal code, class of service, and country code fields are arranged. (The postal code, class of service, and country code are required fields.) Begin with the message header, then the primary data (15 characters), followed by the secondary message (up to 78 characters). Or, begin with the primary data, then the message header, followed by the secondary data. If the postal code data characters are all numeric then the

MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 2. If the characters are alphanumeric, or only contain ASCII characters 65 to 90, then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 3.

If you receive an error 612, check your MaxiCode data. You may have not correctly structured or left out one of the three required fields (postal code, class of service, and country code) or the “~029" character.

M o d e 0 ( O b s o l e t e ) S a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,0200,0200,"MAXICODE" p

B,1,93,V,020,20,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }

{B,1,N,1 p

1,"450660000" p

C,"001" p

C,"840" p

C,"[)~030" p

C,"01~02996" p

C,"1Z12345678~029" p

C,"UPSN~029" p

C,"12345A~029" p

C,"070~029" p

C,"~029" p

C,"1/1~029" p

C,"15~029" p

C,"Y~029" p

C,"60 SADDLEBROOK CT.~029" p

C,"DAYTON~029" p

C,"OH~030" p

C,"~004" p }

MaxiCode bar code (33)

Batch header

Postal code- zip code

(This field determines Mode)

Country code

Class of service

Message header

Transportation header

Tracking number

Origin carrier SCAC

UPS shipper number

Julian day of pickup

Shipment ID (empty)

Package count

Weight (lb.)

Address validation

Street address (empty)

City (empty)

State

EOT

A-2 Samples

M o d e 2 S a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M2" p

B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }

{B,1,N,1 p

1,"[)>~030" p

C,"01~02996" p

C,"068100000~029" p

C,"840~029"

p

C,"001~029"

p

C,"1Z12345675~029"

p

C,"UPSN~029"

p

C,"12345E~029"

p

C,"089~029"

p

C,"~029"

p

C,"1/1~029"

p

C,"10~029"

p

C,"Y~029"

p

C,"~029" p

C,"~029" p

C,"CT~030"

p

C,"~004"

p }

M o d e 3 S a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M3" p

B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }

{B,1,N,1 p

1,"[)>~030" p

C,"01~02996" p

C,"M5E1G45~029"

p

C,"124~029"

p

C,"066~029"

p

C,"1Z12345679~029" p

C,"UPSN~029" p

C,"12345E~029" p

C,"089~029" p

C,"~029"

p

C,"1/1~029"

p

C,"10~029"

p

C,"Y~029" p

C,"~029"

p

C,"TORONTO~029" p

C,"ON~030"

p

C,"~004" p }


Message header


Postal Code


Country code

Class of service

Tracking number

Origin carrier SCAC

UPS shipper number


Shipment ID (empty)

Package count

Weight (lb.)

Address validation


City (empty)

State

EOT


Message header


Postal Code


Country code

Class of service

Tracking number

Origin carrier SCAC

UPS shipper number


Shipment ID (empty)

Package count

Weight (lb.)

Address validation


City (empty)

State

EOT

Samples A-3

S a m p l e D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t s

Data Matrix (ECC-200) is a two-dimensional bar code which is made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are 24 square symbol sizes available ranging from 10 rows by 10 columns to 144 rows by 144 columns. There are six rectangular symbol sizes available ranging from 8 rows by 8 columns to 16 rows by 48 columns. The symbol size is data dependent. Data Matrix automatically pads data.

Make sure you do not overlay other fields when designing your Data Matrix symbol. Smart imaging is automatically disabled on formats with a Data Matrix bar code. You should also allow a 3 or 4 dot “quiet zone” (blank space around the bar code’s perimeter) for scanning. See

“Defining a Bar Code Field” for more information.

S a m p l e B a t c h D a t a w i t h S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s

To use this character in the bar code

null character

~ (tilde)

FNC1

enter these characters in the batch data

~~@

~126~126

~~1

S q u a r e D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t

{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" p

B,1,50,V,50,100,35,0,100,8,L,0

p }

{B,36,N,1 p

1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST"

p }

This example prints a one-inch wide by one-inch tall (100) square Data Matrix symbol using the default density (0) without any field rotation (0).

R e c t a n g u l a r D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t

{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX2" p

B,1,400,V,100,200,35,29,50,8,L,1 p }

{B,36,N,1

p

1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST"

p }

This example prints a one-inch by a half-inch tall (50) rectangular 16 rows by 36 columns

(density 29) Data Matrix symbol rotated 90 (1).

S a m p l e D a t a M a t r i x w i t h F u n c t i o n 1

{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1"

p

B,1,50,V,10,50,35,0,50,8,L,0

p}

{B,36,N,1

p

1,"~~110012345678902"

p}

This example prints a 0.50-inch wide by 0.50-inch tall (50) square Data Matrix symbol using the default density (0) without any field rotation (0). FNC1 appears in the batch data as ~~1.

A-4 Samples

S a m p l e Q u i c k R e s p o n s e P a c k e t s

Quick Response (QR Code) is a two-dimensional bar code, which is made up of square modules arranged in an overall square pattern. A unique finder pattern is located at three corners of the symbol. Four levels of error correction are available, along with a wide range of symbol sizes.

¨ Model 1 is the original specification.

¨ Model 2 is an enhanced form that includes additional features.

The maximum number of characters depends on the type of characters entered for the batch data and differs for the two models of QR Code.

Data Type

Numeric data

Alphanumeric data

8-Bit data

Kanji data

Model1

1167

707

486

299

2710

2710

2710

1817

Model2

QR Code can accommodate Japanese Kana and Kanji characters and has a variety of applications, including marking spark plugs, radiators, printed circuit boards, and test tubes.

Refer to the AIM International Symbology Specification for more details about data requirements.

E n t e r i n g B a t c h D a t a f o r Q R C o d e

QR Code requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch data.

Syntax

"error_cor mask# data_input, char"

error_cor mask# data_input char

Example

Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:

H

Q

Ultra high reliability level

High reliability level

M

L

Standard level

High density level

Note:

As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters (in the field) decreases.

Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.

Type of data input. Options:

A

Automatic

M

Manual

Type of characters. Options:

A

Alphanumeric

B

K

N

Binary

Kanji

Numeric

Note:

In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.

1,"HM,N0123456789012345" p }

Defines the following batch data for the QR Code: The error correction level is H, which provides very high reliability. Leave the mask number blank. The data input mode is Manual.

The type of characters are Numeric and the data is 0123456789012345.

Samples A-5

Q R C o d e P a c k e t

{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE" p

B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p

{B,1,N,1 p

1,"HM,N0123456789012345" p }

S t r u c t u r e d A p p e n d M o d e

QR Code offers a mode called structured append (or concatenated) that allows you to collect data from multiple QR Code symbols and use that data elsewhere. For example, the components of a sub-assembly can have individual QR Codes and the QR Code for the entire assembly contains all the data from the individual codes. This mode also requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch data.

Syntax

"mode_id code# #of_div parity, error_cor mask# data_input char"

mode_id code#

#of_div parity error_cor mask# data_input char

Mode identifier. Use D to indicate the structured append (or concatenated) mode.

Code number of the individual symbol in the concatenated set. You must use a two-digit number in decimal.

Total number of symbols in this concatenated set. You must use a two-digit number in decimal.

Parity byte. You must use a two-digit number in hexadecimal. There is no standard parity byte.

Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:

H

Q

Ultra high reliability level

High reliability level

M

L

Standard level

High density level

Note:

As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters (in the field) decreases.

Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.

Type of data input. Options:

A

Automatic

M

Manual

Type of characters. Options:

A

Alphanumeric

B

K

N

Binary

Kanji

Numeric

Note:

In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.

Example

1,"D0205E9,Q0A," p

C,"B006qrcode," p }

Defines the structured append mode (D) for QR Code. This is symbol (02) of a concatenated set containing (05) symbols. The parity byte is E9. The error correction level is Q, which provides a high reliability. Use 0 for the mask number. The data input mode is Automatic. The type of characters are binary (B) and there will be six (06) data characters (qrcode).

A-6 Samples

S t r u c t u r e d A p p e n d Q R C o d e P a c k e t

{F,2,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE2" p

B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p }

{B,2,N,1 p

1,"D0202E9,Q0A" p

C,"0123456789ABCD+__

âôû~129~064~159~252~224~064" p }

G S 1 D a t a B a r E x a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,""¦

B,1,30,V,5,5,38,4,0,0,L,0,1,2,22¦}


{B,1,N,1¦

1,"123456|Monarch Brand Printers"¦}

H a n g Ta g E x a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,275,125,"1TAG01" p

C,228,20,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"0047896320",1 p

C,203,20,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"045",1 p

C,203,55,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"12",1 p

C,203,85,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"099",1 p

C,178,20,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"00654113",1 p

C,178,85,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"1158",1 p

C,54,37,0,50,14,14,A,L,0,0,"$49.99",1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p}

Ta g E x a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,200,150,"1LAB1520" p

C,44,40,0,50,9,9,A,L,0,0,"PEANUTS",1 p

B,1,12,F,125,25,1,2,50,7,L,0 p

R,1,"028400067362" p

C,20,34,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"*SALT FREE*",1 p

C,84,45,0,50,14,14,A,L,0,0,"$1.19",1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p}

Samples A-7

L a b e l E x a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,300,150,"1LAB1530" p

C,100,90,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,1,"BATTERY PACK",1 p

C,20,130,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,1,"1452-99311",1 p

C,230,128,0,50,12,10,A,L,0,1,"$5.99",1 p

B,1,9,F,75,55,4,7,40,8,L,1 p

R,5,N p

R,1,"031535512" p

T,2,9,V,125,67,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,1,1 p

R,4,1,1,9,1,1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p

1,"AAAAAAAAA" p

2,"KKKKKKKKK" p}

R e c e i p t F o r m a t E x a m p l e

{F,1,A,R,E,300,175,"1Garage" p

C,277,15,0,50,10,18,A,L,0,0,"KRAMER’S",1 p

C,223,4,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"Can Opener",1 p

C,202,4,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"Travel Iron",1 p

C,179,4,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"Total",1 p

C,163,81,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"Tax",1 p

C,140,32,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"TOTAL SALE",1 p

C,86,47,0,50,9,9,A,L,0,0,"* * P A I D * *",1 p

C,60,45,0,50,9,9,A,L,0,0,"THANK YOU!",1 p

C,256,35,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,0,"GARAGE SALE",1 p

C,223,122,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"$2.50",1 p

C,202,122,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"$1.50",1 p

C,182,122,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"$4.00",1 p

C,163,122,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"$0.26",1 p

C,140,123,0,50,8,8,A,L,0,0,"$4.26",1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p}

L a b e l S a m p l e 2

{F,1,A,R,E,110,200,"1LAB2011" p

C,92,70,0,50,7,7,A,L,0,0,"PRETZELS",1 p

B,1,12,F,45,50,1,2,40,7,L,0 p

R,1,"028400067362" p

C,18,105,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,0,"$.79",1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p}

A-8 Samples

L a b e l S a m p l e 3

{F,1,A,R,E,400,200,"1LAB2040" p

C,150,21,0,50,14,12,A,L,0,1,"BATTERY PACK",1 p

C,150,46,0,50,14,12,A,L,0,1,"WAREHOUSE 12",1 p

C,285,70,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,1,"07/14/00",1 p

C,110,70,0,50,10,10,A,L,0,1,"4425",1 p

B,1,13,F,95,165,8,6,90,8,L,1 p

R,5,N p

R,1,"0315355110299" p

T,2,13,V,214,176,0,50,7,9,A,L,0,1,1 p

R,4,1,1,13,1,1 p}


{B,1,N,1 p

1,"AAAAAAAAAAAAA" p

2,"KKKKKKKKKKKKK" p}

S a m p l e C o m p l i a n c e P a c k e t

{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p

L,V,500,115,90,85,3 p

L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p

L,V,500,2,0,390,3 p

L,V,400,2,0,390,3 p

L,V,298,2,0,390,3 p

L,V,200,2,0,390,5 p

C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p

C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p

C,529,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 p

C,511,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 p

C,472,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 p

C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p

C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p

C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 p

C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p

C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p

C,557,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 p

C,547,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 p

C,537,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 p

C,527,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 p

C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 p

T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,2,15,V,511,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p

B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 p

T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,8,20,V,549,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,12,20,V,368,255,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p

R,1,"(420)ÿ" p

Samples A-9

T,16,27,V,270,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

T,17,27,V,240,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p

R,1,"WELCOMES GUEST # " p

T,18,27,V,210,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p }


{B,1,N,1 p

1,"1234567890" p

2,"0987654321" p

3,"~20142032678" p

4,"10028028662854" p

5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" p

6,"RODGER DIST CTR" p

7,"8292" p

8,"BROADWAY" p

9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p

10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" p

11,"" p

12,"08292 123456-123" p

13,"AR" p

14,"999-999999-99" p

15,"32678" p

16,"WYSIWYG" p

17,"99999" p

18,"TO A PRODUCT DEMO" p }

A-10 Samples

S a m p l e F o r m a t P a c k e t

{F,5,A,R,G,576,768,"1HDREC1" p

L,S,19,39,499,39,38,"" p

L,S,19,93,499,93,15,"" p

L,S,19,124,499,124,15,"" p

L,S,19,155,499,155,38,"" p

C,461,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"PO NUMBER ",1 p

C,426,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”STORE " p

C,391,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”CTNS SHOPPED" p

C,357,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS RECVD " p

C,320,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”CARRIER " p

C,259,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT BILL # " p

C,196,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT TERMS " p

C,159,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”KEYREC# " p

C,125,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT CLAIM # " p

C,090,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”RECVD BY " p

C,056,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”DATE RECVD " p

C,461,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”:" p

C,426,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,391,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,357,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,320,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,259,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,196,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,159,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,125,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,090,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

C,056,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p

T,01,08,V,461,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p

T,02,08,V,426,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p

T,03,08,V,391,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0

T,04,08,V,357,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p p

T,05,18,V,290,289,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0

T,06,12,V,230,395,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0

T,07,08,V,196,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0

T,08,08,V,159,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0

T,09,08,V,125,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0

T,10,08,V,090,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p p p p p p

T,11,08,V,056,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0

T,12,11,V,259,762,0,1,2,2,B,B,0,1

R,1,"*_________*" p p p

B,13,09,V,259,720,4,4,145,8,B,1

R,4,12,2,9,1,1 p p

R,50,3,8 p }

Samples A-11

Sample Zero Batch Packet

{B,5,N,0 p }

{B,5,U,1 p

1,"6005710" p

2,"106" p

3,"3" p

4,"3" p

5,"ALLIED FREIGHT1234" p

6,"123456789012" p

7,"P" p

8,"10650337" p

9,"0" p

10,"VIC" p

11,"1/6/94" p

12,"106503378" p }

A-12 Samples

F O N T S

B

Our printers support two types of fonts: Bitmapped (traditional printer fonts such as Standard and Reduced) and Scalable/TrueType® (Font 50). This appendix gives a brief overview of each type of font and how your printer interprets fonts. It also shows examples of the fonts loaded in your printer.

Number Font Size and Appearance Type of

Spacing

5

6

10

11

3

4

1

2

Standard

Reduced

Bold

OCRA-like

HR1 - only for numeric data

HR2 - only for numeric data

CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold 9 pt.

CG Triumvirate™ Type face 6 pt.

monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced proportional proportional

15*

16*

17*

18*

50

1000

1001

1002





EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType®)

CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold 6.5 pt.

CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold 8 pt.


proportional proportional proportional proportional scalable proportional proportional proportional

1003

1004



proportional proportional

1005 CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold 22 pt.

proportional

1006 CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold Con densed 6.5 pt.

proportional

1007 CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold Con densed 8 pt.

proportional


proportional


proportional

1010 CG Triumvirate™

Type face Bold Con densed 18 pt.

proportional

1011 CG Triumvirate™

Type face Bold Con densed 22 pt.

proportional

1012

1013

Letter Gothic Bold 6 pt.

Letter Gothic Bold 9 pt.

monospaced monospaced


# of Dots Between Characters

3

3

3

1

2

1 varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter

1

2

Fonts B-1

These samples were printed using the Internal Symbol set.

Standard Font

Reduced Font

Bold Font

OCRA-like Font

EFF Swiss Bold Font*

* Printed with ANSI Symbol Set

B-2 Fonts

These samples were printed using Code Page 437.

CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold

CG Triumvirate™ Typeface

Fonts B-3

B i t m a p F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n

Our bitmap fonts are either monospaced (each character occupies the same amount of space) or proportional (each character is a different width). Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data you want to list in a column. With proportionally spaced fonts, you may be able to place more characters on a line. However, you may need to experiment with these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format. The bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified.

The magnification range is 1 to 7.

Use the MONARCH® MPCL™

Toolbox (Soft Font Utility), available on our Web site, to convert a bitmap font to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer. Select the point size and characters to print. Bitmap fonts may image faster than a TrueType font, but you are limited to the point size and characters you downloaded.

M o n o s p a c e d F o n t M a g n i f i c a t i o n

Monospaced characters occupy the same amount of space within a magnification. Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data you want to list in a column. Decide how wide and tall you want the characters to appear on the labels. The following two tables show the width and height of each of the monospaced fonts after magnification.

This table includes the default (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) spacing.

1x

7x

Width Mag.

Units

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

Standard

Character

Width Sample

8.37

21.26

17

49.75

126.37

101

Reduced

Character

Width Sample

3.9

9.9

8

24.63

62.56

50

Bold

Character

Width Sample

13.3

33.78

27

84.24

214

171

Only the 1x width can be scanned with the OCRA-like font. Using a printhead with 203 dpi, the character widths are as follows: 7.9 (English), 20.1 (Metric), and 16 (Dots).

To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (14 dots for Standard, 7 dots for Reduced,

24 dots for Bold) by the magnification and add the default spacing (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for

Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) between characters.

Example

14 (Standard font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 70 + 3 (default spacing between characters).

There are 73 dots in the Standard font at 5x.

B-4 Fonts

Standard

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

Reduced

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

10.8

27.4

22

6.9

17.5

14

7x

75.9

192.8

154

48.28

122.6

98

Bold

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

OCRA-like (1x only)

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

11.8

30

24

16.7

42.4

34

117.24

297.8

238

Fonts B-5

P r o p o r t i o n a l F o n t M a g n i f i c a t i o n

Each character in a proportionally spaced font is a different height and width. You may be able to place more characters on a line using proportionally spaced fonts. You may want to experiment with these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format as needed. The bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified.

The magnification range is 1 to 7. The following tables provide height and width magnification of sample characters.

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ™ Ty p e f a c e B o l d ( 9 p t . )

1x

7x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1.48

3.76

3

10.3

26.2

21

Minimum

6.4

16.26

13

44.8

114

91

Average

10.8

27.4

22

75.9

192.8

154

Maximum

To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (3 dots for Minimum, 13 dots for Average,

22 dots for Maximum) by the magnification.

Example

13 (Average font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 65 dots in an average letter of the CG Triumvirate™

Typeface Bold at 5x.

H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n

CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold 1x

1/100 in.

8.87

1/10 mm

22.5

dots

18

7x

56

158

126

B-6 Fonts

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 6 p t . )

1x

7x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

.99

2.51

2

6.9

17.5

14

Minimum

2.96

7.52

6

20.7

52.6

42

Average

5.9

15

12

41.4

105.2

84

Maximum


CG Triumvirateä Typeface

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

5.9

14.99

12

7x

41.38

105.1

84

Fonts B-7


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

.99

Minimum

2.96

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

2.51

2

6.9

17.5

14

7.52

6

20.7

52.6

42

Average


5.9

15

12

41.4

105.2

84

Maximum


1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

8.87

22.5

18

7x

56

158

126


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

.99

Minimum

2.96

Average

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

2.51

2

6.9

17.5

14

7.52

6

20.7

52.6

42


5.9

15

12

41.4

105.2

84

Maximum

CG Triumvirateä

Typeface

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

8.87

22.5

18

7x

68

172.7

138

B-8 Fonts


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

.99

Minimum

2.96

Average

7x

1/10 mm 2.51

Dots

1/100 in.

2

6.9

1/10 mm 17.5

Dots 14

7.52

6

20.7

52.6

42

5.9

15

12

41.4

105.2

84

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

8.87

22.5

18

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 1 5 p t . )

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

.99

Minimum

2.96

Average

7x

1/10 mm 2.51

Dots

1/100 in.

2

6.9

1/10 mm 17.5

Dots 14

7.52

6

20.7

52.6

42


7x

68

172.7

138

5.9

15

12

41.4

105.2

84

Maximum


1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

8.87

22.5

18

7x

68

172.7

138

Fonts B-9

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d ( 6 . 5 p t . )

Average

1x

7x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1.04

Minimum

2.65

2

7.29

18.52

14

3.65

9.26

7

25.52

64.82

49

6.25

15.88

12

43.75

111.13

84

F o n t # 1 0 0 0

Maximum


CG Triumvirateä Typeface 1x

1/100 in.

6.77

1/10 mm

17.20

dots

13

7x

47.40

120.39

91

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d ( 8 p t . )

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1.56

Minimum

5.73

Average

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

3.97

3

6.9

17.5

14

14.55

11

20.7

52.6

42

10.94

F o n t # 1 0 0 1

Maximum

27.78

21

41.4

105.2

84



1/100 in.

8.33

1/10 mm

21.17

dots

16

B-10 Fonts

7x

58.33

148.17

112

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d ( 1 0 p t . )

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1.56

Minimum

6.77

Average

13.02

7x

1/10 mm 3.97

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

3

10.94

27.78

Dots 21

17.20

13

47.4

120.39

91

33.07

25

91.15

231.51

175

F o n t # 1 0 0 2

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

10.42

26.46

20

7x

72.92

185.21

140


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

2.60

Minimum

8.85

Average

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

6.61

5

18.23

46.30

35

22.49

17

67.94

157.43

119

F o n t # 1 0 0 3

Maximum

16.15

41.01

31

113.02

287.07

217


CG Triumvirateä

Typeface

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

12.50

31.75

24

7x

87.50

222.25

168

Fonts B-11


F o n t # 1 0 0 4

Point sizes greater than 12 include only the following special characters:

0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr

ö¢£¥. Since this font does not support the full ANSI character set, some characters above decimal value 127 are substituted. For example, decimal value 191 prints the Yen symbol (¥) instead of the upside-down question mark (¿).

1x

7x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

7.81

19.84

Minimum

15

54.69

138.91

105

12.50

31.75

24

87.50

222.25

168

Average

22.92

58.21

44

160.42

407.46

308

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

19.27

48.95

37

7x

134.90

342.64

259

B-12 Fonts


F o n t # 1 0 0 5


0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

9.38

23.81

Minimum

18

65.63

166.69

126

15.63

39.68

30

109.38

277.81

210

Average

27.08

68.79

52

189.58

481.54

364

Maximum



1/100 in.

23.44

1/10 mm dots

59.53

54

7x

164.05

416.72

315

Fonts B-13

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d C o n d ( 6 . 5 p t . )

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1.04

Minimum

3.65

Average

6.25

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

2.65

2

7.29

18.52

14

9.26

7

25.52

64.82

49

15.88

12

43.75

111.13

84

F o n t # 1 0 0 6

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

6.77

17.20

13

7x

47.40

120.39

91

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d C o n d ( 8 p t . ) F o n t # 1 0 0 7

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1.56

Minimum

4.69

Average

8.85

Maximum

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

3.97

3

10.94

27.78

21

11.91

9

32.81

83.34

63

22.49

17

67.94

157.43

119


CG Triumvirateä

Typeface

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

8.85

22.49

17

7x

61.98

157.43

119

B-14 Fonts

C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e B o l d C o n d ( 1 0 p t . )

1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

2.08

Minimum

5.73

Average

11.98

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

5.29

4

14.58

37.04

28

14.55

11

40.10

101.86

77

30.43

23

83.85

212.99

161

F o n t # 1 0 0 8

Maximum


CG Triumvirateä

Typeface

1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

10.94

27.78

21

7x

76.56

194.47

147


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

2.60

Minimum

7.29

Average

14.58

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

6.61

5

18.23

46.30

35

18.52

14

51.04

129.65

98

38.04

28

96.88

246.06

186

F o n t # 1 0 0 9

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

13.02

33.07

25

7x

91.15

231.51

175

Fonts B-15


F o n t # 1 0 1 0


0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr


1x

7x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

7.81

19.84

Minimum

15

54.69

138.91

105

10.94

27.78

21

76.56

194.47

147

Average

21.88

55.56

42

153.12

388.94

294

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

20.31

51.59

39

7x

142.19

361.16

273

B-16 Fonts


F o n t # 1 0 11


0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kpr


1x

Width Mag.

1/100 in.

7x

1/10 mm

Dots

1/100 in.

1/10 mm

Dots

9.38

23.81

Minimum

18

65.63

166.69

126

13.02

33.07

25

91.15

231.51

175

Average

26.56

67.47

51

185.94

472.28

357

Maximum



1/100 in.

1/10 mm dots

1x

24.48

62.18

47

7x

171.35

435.24

329

Fonts B-17

S c a l a b l e F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n

The scalable font is smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges because the font is created from an equation every time it is used. The field width varies with each letter.

When you define formats using scalable fonts, remember to set the character rotation to 0, because it is not supported. However, field rotation is supported for text or constant text fields using the scalable font. The scalable font does not print a slashed zero.

Scalable fonts perform better in constant text fields, because those fields are imaged only once per batch, not once per label as in text fields. The transparent overlay allows closer field placement when using scalable fonts.

To use large point sizes (greater than 60), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.

The height and width magnification are defined in point size.

72 points = one inch. One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the individual characters of the scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. If the height and width are not set to the same point size, the printed characters look tall and thin or short and thick, which allows for greater flexibility in the appearance of the font.

The 72 point EFF Swiss Bold sample shows the one inch cell size.

6pt Sample

10pt Sample

24pt Sample

48pt

Sample

7 2 p t

Sample

1"

B-18 Fonts

Tr u e Ty p e F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n

TrueType fonts follow the TrueType outline font standard. These fonts are smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges, because the font is created from an equation every time it is used. The height and width magnification are defined in point size. 72 points = one inch.

One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the individual characters of the scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. The field width varies with each letter. The printer can accept downloaded TrueType fonts.

D o w n l o a d i n g Tr u e Ty p e F o n t s

The MONARCH® MPCL™ Toolbox (Font Utility) is available on our Web site and converts

TrueType fonts to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer.

When downloading a TrueType font, you download the entire font, not particular characters or one point size. You can print a variety of symbol sets with International (Turkish, Latin, Spanish, etc.) characters. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all symbol sets may not be supported in a given font.

These font files are large and may image slower than bitmap fonts. The size of the font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must have available for fonts in the printer’s downloadable fonts buffer.

You may need to reallocate memory to use downloaded TrueType fonts. After reallocating memory, resend the font, format, and batch packets. See “Defining the Memory Configuration

Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information. Also, Chapter 2 lists some special considerations when defining memory for downloaded TrueType fonts.

U s i n g I n t e r n a t i o n a l F o n t s

International fonts are available as bitmap or TrueType fonts. See "Bitmap Font Information" or

"TrueType Font Information" for more details. To use these fonts, you must purchase the optional micro SD card and download the font to the micro SD card.

To use International fonts, consider the following information:

¨ All fonts contain an internal character mapping. The mapping is organized by one or more standards, such as BIG5. These mapping standards can provide over 65,000 characters, which are not represented in this manual.

The printer supports several mapping standards:

¨

Unicode (UCS-2)

¨

¨

¨

BIG5

GB2312

SJIS

¨ Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the font's character mapping. For example, to print Japanese characters, select symbol set 102

(Unicode) and a font compatible with that symbol set. See "Selecting a Symbol Set" for more information.

¨ To enter batch data, use the method specified by the font's character mapping and a compatible symbol set.

Fonts B-19

S e l e c t i n g a S y m b o l S e t

Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the font's character mapping. The symbol set parameter identifies the character mapping used in the text field or constant text field, for example, Unicode, BIG5, etc. If no symbol set is selected, the default symbol set (Internal Symbol Set) is used.

The printer automatically translates some character mappings to others. For example, if you need a BIG5 font, it is possible to use Unicode text data. Use Unicode in the symbol set parameter to indicate the text mapping and select the BIG5 font needed in the font parameter

(T8 or C5). The printer automatically translates the Unicode character values into BIG5 values before printing the character.

The following table lists the compatible mappings and symbol sets.

Font Character Mapping Symbol Set Parameter (T15, C13, or A6)

Unicode

Unicode

Unicode

Unicode

Unicode

BIG5

GB2312

SJIS

GB2312

BIG5

Batch Data*

TrueType Font

Character Mapping

BIG5

SJIS

KSC5601

GB2312

Unicode

Unicode

Unicode

SJIS

GB2312

BIG5 use in text or constant text fields

102 - Unicode

If you are unsure which character mapping to select, use this symbol set, because the printer automatically translates the character mappings.

103 - BIG5

104 - GB2312

105 - SJIS (Code Page 932 - Japanese Shift-JIS)

106 - GB2312 (Code Page 936 - Simplified Chinese)

107 - BIG5 (Code Page 950 - Traditional Chinese)

* Characters in batch data must be entered based on their mapping (Unicode, BIG5, etc.).

Note:

Symbol sets 102-107 require a downloaded International TrueType font.

I n t e r n a t i o n a l F o n t S a m p l e

{F,3,A,R,E,150,200,"SIMPLE" p

T,1,5,V,10,10,0,100,30,30,B,L,0,0,102

p }

{B,3,U,1 p

1,"~125~000~125~002~125~004~125~005"

p }

This example prints these four characters with Unicode batch data of ~125~000, ~125~002,

~125~004 and ~125~005.

Refer to the Internet for a listing of the characters in each code page. Search on a particular code page, such as “code page 936" to view the characters in that code page.

B-20 Fonts

L i c e n s i n g Yo u r F o n t s

We provide you with tools to create and download TrueType fonts. However, it is your responsibility to purchase and license any fonts you download to your printer. Contact your font supplier for licensing information. Additional fonts that are compatible with the printer can be purchased from:

The Electronic Font Foundry

11 Silwood Road; Ascot; SL5 OPY; England

(0)1344 875 201 www.eff.co.uk

Korean, Chinese, and Japanese fonts can be purchased from:

Dynalab Inc.

2055 Gateway Place; Suite 400; San Jose, CA 95110

408-490-4224 www.dynalab.com

L o c a t i n g t h e F o n t N u m b e r i n a F o n t P a c k e t

If you are creating font packets, the font number is the second parameter in the packet.

Software is available to create the font data and packet. Call Technical Support for more information.

Example

{W,200,A,M,68 p font data

p font data p }

Font Number

Use this number in T8 or in C5. See “Defining Text Fields” or “Defining Constant Text Fields” in

Chapter 2 for more information.

Example

Font Number

T,1,10,V,30,10,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p

C,50,30,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0

p

Font Number

Defines a text and constant text field using the downloaded (#200) font.

Fonts B-21

B-22 Fonts

S Y M B O L S E T S / C O D E P A G E S

This appendix contains a listing of the symbol sets, code pages, and extended character sets the printer supports.

Use the charts in this appendix to convert dot sequences from the image dot pattern to codes you can use in the fields. Use the Binary to Hex Conversion Chart to convert

Binary dot sequences to Hexadecimal numbers for bitmap files. Use the Dot to Run

Length Encoding Chart to convert dot sequences to alphabetic characters for bitmap files.

C

S u p p o r t e d S y m b o l S e t s a n d C o d e P a g e s

The printers support these symbol sets and code pages: Internal, ANSI, Bold, OCRA

Character Set, DOS Code Page 437 and 850. Additional Code Pages are supported with downloaded TrueType or Unicode (double-byte) fonts. The printer defaults to the internal symbol set. See “Defining the System Setup Packet” in Chapter 2 to change the symbol set.

Note:

Fonts 1004, 1005, 1010, and 1011 are limited to the following special characters:

0123456789#$%&(),./@DFKLMPS\kprö¢£¥. Since this font does not support the full

ANSI character set, some characters above decimal value 127 are substituted.

S e l e c t i n g a S y m b o l S e t o r C o d e P a g e

The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and

850 Symbol Sets. These fonts print a slashed zero when using the ANSI symbol set.

Internal

ANSI

DOS Code

Pages 437 or 850

Use this symbol set to print international monetary symbols, the trademark

(™) symbol, and for formats that may be used on other MPCLII printers.

Use this symbol set with proportionally spaced fonts.

Use this symbol set for extended and international characters with proportionally spaced fonts.

U s i n g C o d e 1 2 8 F u n c t i o n C o d e s

This table lists the characters for Bar Code 128 function codes. These functions are used with scanners.

Code

~201

~202

~203

~204

Function Code

F1

F2

F3

F4

Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-1

E n t e r i n g E x t e n d e d C h a r a c t e r s

When using extended characters in your batch data file, type a tilde in front of the three-digit code. For example, if you want to include the character Ä in a text field using the Internal

Symbol Set, type:

1,"~142"

p

U s i n g I n t e r n a t i o n a l C h a r a c t e r S e t s / C o d e P a g e s

Symbol sets 100, 101, 852-860, and 1250-1258 may only be used with the scalable font (font

50) or downloaded TrueType fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all symbol sets may not be supported in a given font. For example, to print Hebrew characters, you need to find a font (such as Arial) that supports Hebrew characters; convert, and then download the font to your printer. Make sure the correct symbol set for Hebrew characters is selected.

Font 50 does not print the slashed zero or support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). The Euro-dollar symbol at position ~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced, and Bold fonts.

Code pages 102-107 contain thousands of characters, which are not represented in this manual.

These code pages require additional memory and a downloaded International TrueType font.

The Code Pages (100 and greater) on the following pages were printed using Arial or a similar downloaded TrueType font. To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the character. For example, to produce the

ÿ

character with the ANSI character set, you would press Alt 255 (column 15 + row 240).

I n t e r n a l S y m b o l S e t

C-2 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

A N S I S y m b o l S e t

B o l d C h a r a c t e r S e t


O C R A C h a r a c t e r S e t

C o d e P a g e 1 0 0 ( M a c i n t o s h )


C o d e P a g e 1 0 1 ( W i n g d i n g s )

C o d e P a g e 4 3 7 ( L a t i n U . S . )


C o d e P a g e 8 5 0 ( L a t i n 1 )

C o d e P a g e 8 5 2 ( L a t i n 2 )


C o d e P a g e 8 5 5 ( R u s s i a n )

C o d e P a g e 8 5 7 ( I B M Tu r k i s h )


C o d e P a g e 8 6 0 ( M S - D O S P o r t u g u e s e )

C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 0 ( L a t i n 2 )


C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 1 ( C y r i l l i c )

C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 2 ( L a t i n 1 )


C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 3 ( G r e e k )

C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 4 ( Tu r k i s h )


C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 5 ( H e b r e w )

C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 6 ( A r a b i c )


C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 7 ( B a l t i c )

C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 8 ( V i e t n a m e s e )


A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t

Use the chart below to translate the characters printed on your test label. The chart lists ASCII characters and their hexadecimal and decimal equivalents.

Char.

Backspace

Tab linefeed home form feed carriage return

SO

SI

DLE

DC1

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

Hex

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

03

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

Decimal

10

11

8

9

12

13

14

15

16

17

5

6

7

3

4

0

1

2

Char.

SUB

Escape cursor right cursor left cursor up cursor down space

“

!

#

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

Hex

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

15

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

Decimal

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

21

22

23

24

25

18

19

20


,

Char.

&

‘

(

$

%

)

*

++

2

3

0

1

.

-

/

4

5

6

9

:

7

8

A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )

Hex

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

24

25

26

27

28

Decimal

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

36

37

38

39

40

Char.

J

I

G

H

K

L

M

P

Q

N

O

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

=

>

?

;

<

Decimal

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

59

60

61

62

63

Hex

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F


A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )

Char.

` a

^^

_ b c d g h e f

Y

Z

W

X

\

[

]

T

U

V

R

S

Decimal

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

82

83

84

85

86

Hex

5E

5F

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

52

53

54

55

56

Char.

p q n o r s t k l m j

I p

{ y z

}

~ delete w x u v

Decimal

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

105

106

107

108

109

Hex

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

6E

6F

70

71

72

73

74

69

6A

6B

6C

6D


B i n a r y t o H e x C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t

Binary

00000000

00000001

00000010

00000011

00000100

00000101

00000110

00000111

00001000

00001001

00001010

00001011

00001100

00001101

00001110

00001111

00010000

00010001

00010010

00010011

00010100

00010101

00010110

00010111

00011000

00011001

00011010

00011011

00011100

00011101

00011110

00011111

Hex

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

07

08

09

0A

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

17

18

19

1A

Binary

00100000

00100001

00100010

00100011

00100100

00100101

00100110

00100111

00101000

00101001

00101010

00101011

00101100

00101101

00101110

00101111

00110000

00110001

00110010

00110011

00110100

00110101

00110110

00110111

00111000

00111001

00111010

00111011

00111100

00111101

00111110

00111111

Hex

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

27

28

29

2A

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

37

38

39

3A


B i n a r y t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )

Binary

01001110

01001111

01010000

01010001

01010010

01010011

01010100

01010101

01010110

01010111

01011000

01011001

01011010

01011011

01011100

01011101

01011110

01011111

01000000

01000001

01000010

01000011

01000100

01000101

01000110

01000111

01001000

01001001

01001010

01001011

01001100

01001101

Hex

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

55

56

57

58

52

53

54

4E

4F

50

51

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

Binary

01101110

01101111

01110000

01110001

01110010

01110011

01110100

01110101

01110110

01110111

01111000

01111001

01111010

01111011

01111100

01111101

01111110

01111111

01100000

01100001

01100010

01100011

01100100

01100101

01100110

01100111

01101000

01101001

01101010

01101011

01101100

01101101

Hex

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

75

76

77

78

6E

6F

70

71

72

73

74

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

60

61

62

63

64

65

66



Binary

10001110

10001111

10010000

10010001

10010010

10010011

10010100

10010101

10010110

10010111

10011000

10011001

10011010

10011011

10011100

10011101

10011110

10011111

10000000

10000001

10000010

10000011

10000100

10000101

10000110

10000111

10001000

10001001

10001010

10001011

10001100

10001101

Hex

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

95

96

97

98

92

93

94

8E

8F

90

91

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

Binary

10101110

10101111

10110000

10110001

10110010

10110011

10110100

10110101

10110110

10110111

10111000

10111001

10111010

10111011

10111100

10111101

10111110

10111111

10100000

10100001

10100010

10100011

10100100

10100101

10100110

10100111

10101000

10101001

10101010

10101011

10101100

10101101

Hex

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BC

BF

B5

B6

B7

B8

AE

AF

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6



Binary

11001110

11001111

11010000

11010001

11010010

11010011

11010100

11010101

11010110

11010111

11011000

11011001

11011010

11011011

11011100

11011101

11011110

11011111

11000000

11000001

11000010

11000011

11000100

11000101

11000110

11000111

11001000

11001001

11001010

11001011

11001100

11001101

Hex

D9

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

D5

D6

D7

D8

CE

CF

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

Binary

11101110

11101111

11110000

11110001

11110010

11110011

11110100

11110101

11110110

11110111

11111000

11111001

11111010

11111011

11111100

11111101

11111110

11111111

11100000

11100001

11100010

11100011

11100100

11100101

11100110

11100111

11101000

11101001

11101010

11101011

11101100

11101101

Hex

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF

F5

F6

F7

F8

EE

EF

F0

F1

F2

F3

F4

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

E0

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6


D o t t o R u n L e n g t h E n c o d i n g C h a r t

O N ( B l a c k ) D o t s

# of Dots

6

7

8

4

5

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

Code

F

G

H

D

E

A

B

C

K

L

J

I

M

O F F ( W h i t e D o t s )

# of Dots

6

7

8

4

5

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

Code

f g h d e a b c k l j

I m

# of Dots

17

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

22

23

24

25

26

# of Dots

17

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

22

23

24

25

26

Code

t s u q r n o p x y v w z

Code

S

T

U

Q

R

N

O

P

V

W

X

Y

Z


F O R M A T D E S I G N T O O L S

Use copies of these worksheets and grids to create formats, batch data, and check digit schemes. You may want to keep copies of the completed forms for your records:

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

Online Configuration Worksheet

Batch Worksheet

Check Digit Worksheet

Supply Layout Grids (English, Metric, Dots)

Format Worksheet

Sample Format Worksheet

D

Format Design Tools D-1

O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n W o r k s h e e t

I

A

B

D

F

E

G

M

C O

D-2 Format Design Tools

B a t c h W o r k s h e e t

B

FIELD #

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

4

5

6

1

2

3

DATA

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DATA


C h e c k D i g i t W o r k s h e e t

A R

WEIGHTS

A8

A R

WEIGHTS

A8

A R

WEIGHTS

A8


6.0

Supply Layout

(Inches)

Indicates

No-Print

Area

5.0

4.0

4.25 (Thermal Direct)

0.05

3.0

2.0

1.0

0.0

0.05

0,0

1.0

2.0

3.0

0.05

4.09 (Thermal Transfer)

4.0


152

Supply Layout

(Metric)

Indicates

No-Print

Area

108 (Thermal Direct)

1

76

51

25

127

102

0,0

1

0,0 25 51 76

1

104 (Thermal Transfer)

102


1218

Supply Layout

(Dots)

Indicates

No-Print

Area

864 (Thermal Direct)

10

1015

812

609

406

203

0,0

10

0,0

203 406 609

10

832 (Thermal Transfer)

812



G L O S S A R Y

Batch Data

2,"Monarch"

p

Batch Control

E,0,1,4,2

p

Batch Header

{B,1,N,1}

Defines the actual information (as fields within { }) printed on the label.

Defines the print job (as a field).

Batch Packet

{B,1,N,1

p

2,"Monarch"

p }

Contains a batch header and the batch data. Enclosed within { }.

Bitmapped Fonts

Reside in the printer’s memory. If you change the point size, you have changed the font. Magnifying these fonts causes some jaggedness to occur.

Buffer

First line of a batch, immediately following ({). Identifies the format and batch quantity.

Storage area in the printer’s memory that holds specific data (images, formats, etc).

Field

Can be text, bar codes, lines, boxes, constant, or non-printable text. It is the result of a field definition.

Field Definition

Any string of parameters that pertain to one field. A field definition begins with a field identifier (such as T, B, D, C, etc.).

T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0 p

Field Parameters

Parameters that apply to a field and are separated by commas. (In the above example, B is a field element for black print on a white background.)

Flash Memory

Format

Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off.

Layout or design for your printed label.

Format Header

First line of a format, immediately following the start of packet ({). A format header must begin with F, followed by various header elements.

{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt-1" p

Monospaced Fonts All characters have the same width and are easy to center justify.

(Standard, bold, and reduced are monospaced.)

Non-volatile RAM

Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off.

Option

R,4,6,1,3,1

p

Packet

{B,1,N,1

p

2,"Monarch"

p }

Pre-image

Any line within a format that applies special formatting to a field. This line always begins with R and must immediately follow the field it applies to.

Any string of characters within ({ }).

A way to optimize the printer, because it images the fields while data is collected. After the last field is imaged, the label prints almost immediately.

Proportionally

Spaced Fonts

Scalable Fonts

All characters have different widths and are difficult to center justify (CG

Triumvirate™ Typefaces).

All characters are scalable and smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges at any point size because the font is created from an equation every time it is used.

Soft (Downloaded)

Fonts

Reside in the printer’s RAM. They can be erased or overwritten.

TrueType Fonts

Volatile RAM

All characters follow the TrueType outline font standard. All characters are scalable and smooth at any point size.

Contains information that is LOST when the printer is turned off.

I N D E X

A

adding custom fonts

adjustments, print

algorithm,in sum of digits

algorithm,in sum of products

alignment,bar code

allocating

memory

Arabic characters

B

backfeed

packet syntax

Baltic characters

bar code

defining aspect ratios

PDF417 options

bar code alignment

bar code density

syntax

bar codes

character lengths

customizing density

defining

defining densities

determining distance

generating check digits

justification

list of types

placing human readables

rotating

selecting a density

selecting human readables

batch

canceling printing

clearing data from memory

downloading sample

overview of packet

sample

batch control

definition of term

batch control field

defining

syntax sample

batch data

definition of term

sample with special char using special char

batch data field

defining

syntax sample using entered/copied data

2-14

C-12

4-7

4-7

3-13

4-6

3-8

4-6

3-7

4-6

3-9, 3-14

4-5

3-13

3-9

9-3

3-13

3-9

3-13

2-11

2-20

6-1

6-2

A-10

G-1

6-2

6-2

6-2

G-1

6-3

6-3

6-3

6-3

6-3

6-3

2-20

2-5

4-11

4-10

3-13

2-16

C-11

batch header

syntax defining

definition of term

sample

using zero quantities

batch method of downloading

batch packet

definition of term

batch quantity zero

syntax

batch quantity, defined

baud rate selection

bitmap

defining fields

defining next fields

defining the header

fonts, definition of term

hexadecimal chart

hexadecimal method overview

run length chart

run length method

storing the image

black to white print ratio

boxes

defining determining distance

buffer

definition of term

scalable font

buffer selection buffer size selection

C

calling technical support

changing

backfeed control

bar code density

communication settings

control characters

memory configuration

security level of PDF417

character rotation

in constant text field

in text field

characters

magnifying font size

number of in bar code

number of in text

padding

placement of human readables

chart

hexadecimal conversion

run length conversion

check digit option

syntax

G-1

6-4

A-11

6-2

2-13

5-8

5-9

5-7

G-1

C-16

5-1, 5-3

5-1

C-20

5-1, 5-4

5-5

5-2

3-19

3-19

G-1

2-18

2-16

2-16

6-2

6-2

G-1

6-2

9-2

6-4

B-4

3-7

3-3

4-4

9-3

C-16

C-20

4-5

8-3

2-14

4-6

2-13

2-10

2-16

4-7

3-15

3-5

Index 1

check digit schemes

syntax

using sum of digits

using sum of products

check digit worksheet

check digits

clearing scheme from memory

customizing a scheme

generating

checking

ENQ trailer characters

ENQ/IMD characters

job status

packet control characters

printer status

RS232 trailer characters

clearing packets

code pages

1250 table

1251 table

1252 table

1253 table

1254 table

1255 table

1256 table

1257 table

1258 table

437 and 850

437 table

850 table

852 table

855 table

857 table

860 table

ANSI table

Bold table

entering

International characters

OCRA table

selecting

color options of text

communication

checklist for trouble

packet syntax

compatibility

considering unit of measure

compliance

format sample

configuration

types of

configuration packets

backfeed control packet G

communication settings packet F

control characters packet E

guidelines

header

memory configuration packet M

monetary formatting packet D

overview

print control packet C

sample

supply setup packet B

system setup packet A

4-10

4-11

4-10

D-3

2-20

4-10

4-5

C-8

C-3

C-3

C-2

2-6

C-4

C-1

3-4, 3-15

C-12

C-12

C-1

C-5

C-6

C-6

C-7

C-7

C-1

C-8

C-9

C-9

C-10

C-10

C-11

C-11

8-1

8-1

7-7

8-1

7-1

8-1

2-20

8-2

2-13

1-5

A-9

2-1

2-14

2-13

2-10

2-5

2-3

2-16

2-9

2-3

2-8

2-4

2-7

2-6

2 Index constant text fields

character rotation

defining determining distance

justification modifying character height modifying character width rotating

sample

control characters

factory defaults

resetting

selecting selecting new syntax

copy command

sample

copy data

in partial form

merging fields source field

syntax

copying data, using option 4

Cyrillic characters

D

daily checklist

data

copy option 4

deciding on a field type

for batch

list of errors

padding option 30

stream, examples stream, Maxicode

type restrictions option 2

data type restrictions

defining option 2

decimal point selection

decrementing fields

fixing the first number syntax using option 60

defining


bar code type

bar codes

batch control field

batch data field

batch header

bitmap fields

boxes

check digit scheme w/sod

check digit scheme w/sop


configuration header

constant text fields


duplicate fields

font upload packet

graphic header

lines



3-15

3-14

3-14

3-15

3-15

3-15

3-15

3-14, 3-16

2-2

2-11

2-10

2-10

2-10

6-1

4-4

4-3

4-3

4-2 - 4-3

4-3

C-9

1-3

4-2

2-9

4-8

4-8

4-8

4-3

1-6

6-3

8-3

4-4

A-2

A-2

4-2

2-14

3-9

3-7

6-2

6-3

6-2

5-8

3-19

4-11

4-10

2-13

2-3

3-14

2-10

5-9

2-20

5-7

3-17

2-16

2-9

next-bitmap fields




text fields

definition of terms

density

using option 50 to customize

design tools

about the grid

check digit worksheet

format worksheet

online configuration worksheet

worksheet overview

designing a format

drawing a sketch

field type considerations filling in worksheets

print area

using grids

worksheet overview

determining format content

device selection

diagnostics

list of data errors

list of data format errors

list of hard printer failure errors

list of machine fault errors

list of memory card errors

other resources

printing test label

direction of

bar code field

constant text character constant text field

of lines

text character text field

disable backfeed

double-byte fonts

downloadable fonts

buffer

downloading

batch method batch quantity zero method methods

order packets should be received overview sample

sequential method

E

enable backfeed

enabling immediate commands

ENQ

printing existing config

reference table for byte 2

reference table of byte 3

requesting status

Response

erasing packets

4-6

2-18

2-14

2-11

8-1

7-3 - 7-6

7-5

7-1

7-1

2-20

5-9

2-8

2-7

2-6

3-3

G-1

1-5

D-3

D-1

D-3

1-6

1-4

1-6

1-6

1-4

1-5

1-6

1-4

2-16

8-3

8-11

8-15

8-12

8-15

8-3

8-1

6-4

6-4

6-4

6-1

6-1

6-1

6-4

3-13

3-15

3-15

3-17

3-5

3-5

2-14

B-19

errors

data, description of

format

hard printer failures

machine faults

memory card

8-3

8-11

8-15

8-12

8-15

F

feed mode selection

field

bitmap, defining

definition definition of term

duplicate,defining

elements, definition of term

next-bitmap, defining

field options

brief list of

calculating check digits

copy data

customized bar code density


6-2

inc/dec fields

ordering overview

padding data

price field

restrictions

security/truncation for PDF417

using multiple

width/length for PDF417

fields

bar code rotation

batch control syntax

batch data syntax

constant text rotation

deciding a type

finding trailing spaces

padding

repeating parameters

text field rotation

types briefly described using a worksheet

using data entry/copied fields

fixed data

in constant text field

in text field

syntax

flash memory

definition of term

flow control selection

font

legal information

3-16

3-3

4-2

G-1

2-13

B-21

packets, clearing from memory

scalable

2-20

B-18

TrueType

2-6, 3-16, B-1, B-19, B-21, C-2

upload packet, defining 2-20

3-13

6-2

6-3

3-15

1-6

9-3

4-4

9-3

3-5

1-6

1-6

6-3

4-8

4-1

4-1

4-4

4-5

4-1

4-7

4-1

4-7

4-1

4-5

4-3

4-6

4-2

5-8

G-1

G-1

5-9

G-1

5-9

fonts

double-byte

monospaced magnification

optimizing

proportional magnification

B-19

B-4

9-3

B-6

Index 3

format

buffer

definition of term header, definition of term

worksheet

worksheet

formats

clearing from memory

decisions to make

defining bar codes

defining boxes

defining constant text fields

defining lines

defining text fields

defining the header

designing

determining content

downloading sample

field types described briefly filling in worksheets

modifying

referenced in batch packet

sample

sample of compliance

using grids

formatting errors

list of

2-18

G-1

G-1

D-1

1-6

8-11

G

generating check digits with option 31

graphic

defining bitmap fields

defining duplicate fields defining next-bitmap fields

defining the header

hexadecimal chart

hexadecimal method

including in a format

overview of bitmap

packets, clearing from memory

run length chart

run length method

storing the image

Greek characters

grid

overview

4-5

5-8

5-9

5-9

5-7

C-16

5-1, 5-3

5-12

5-1

2-20

C-20

5-1, 5-4

5-5

C-10

1-5

H

hard printer failure errors

list of

Hebrew characters

help, getting

hex graphic packet

sample

human readable characters

placement considerations

selecting for a bar code

8-15

C-11

8-3

5-10

9-3

3-13

2-20

1-4

3-7

3-19

3-14

3-17

3-3

3-2

1-3 - 1-4

1-4

6-1

1-6

1-6

6-5

6-2

A-1

A-9

1-5

I

image buffer

imaging

repeating parameters

using zero batch headers

imaging time

IMD

when to use scalable fonts


immediate commands

enabling sending table when to use

incrementing fields

fixing the first number

restrictions

syntax using option 60

inquiry request

explanation of

inquiry response

explanation of

International code pages

J

job request

syntax

job response

explanation of syntax for 0-2

syntax for 3

syntax for 4

job status

explanation of response requesting

table

justification

of bar code

of constant text fields

of text field

L

2-17

9-3

9-2

9-3

8-1

2-11

2-11

2-11

2-11

4-8

4-1

4-8

4-8

7-1

7-1

2-6

7-7

7-7

7-9

3-13

3-15

3-5

7-7

7-7

7-7

7-8

7-9

4 Index

M

machine errors

list of

magnification

considerations

of monospaced fonts

of proportional fonts

mapping

method, hexadecimal method, run length

margin adjustment selection

Maxicode

data stream

MaxiCode information

measurement

on a grid using multiple printer types

memory

allocating

card errors, list of

clearing packets

packet syntax

storing images in RAM

memory buffer

downloadable fonts format

image receive

scalable font

transmit

merging

copied data fields with option 4

modifying formats

modulus

description of check digit calc

in sum of digits

in sum of products

monetary

decimal selection formatting syntax list of options symbol selection symbol setting

using price formatting

monospaced fonts

definition of term

magnification

O

online configuration worksheet

online mode selection

opaque overlay

explanation

optimizing

compatibility for multiple printers

print quality print speed

repeating field parameters

using zero batch quantities

option

definition of term

optional entry method

8-12

9-3

B-4

B-6

5-1, 5-3

5-1, 5-4

2-8

A-2

A-2

1-5

1-5

G-1

B-4

D-3

2-6

3-4

2-16

8-15

2-20

2-16

5-5

2-18

2-18

2-17

2-17

2-18

2-17

1-5

9-1

9-1

9-3

9-2

G-1

6-5

4-3

4-3

6-5

4-10

4-11

4-10

2-9

2-9

2-9

2-9

2-9

4-5

options,field

brief list of

calculating check digits

copy data

customized bar code density


general overview

inc/dec fields

ordering

padding data

price formatting

restrictions

security/truncation for PDF417

using multiple

width/length for PDF417

P

packet

A, syntax

B, syntax

C, syntax

D, syntax

definition of term

E, syntax

F, syntax

G, syntax

M, syntax

packet control characters

factory defaults


resetting

syntax

packets

batch

check digit scheme

clearing from memory

configuration

configuration upload

guidelines

padding data syntax

parameters

definition of term

for batch control field

for batch data field

for batch header

repeating

parity selection

PDF417 bar codes

security/truncation width/length

placing

human readables

point size

polling for status

overview

Portuguese characters

positioning

graphic image in a field

graphic image in a format

graphic image in a packet

pre-image

definition of term

4-2

4-1

4-8

4-1

4-4

4-5

4-1

4-7

4-1

4-7

4-6

4-1

4-5

4-3

4-6

G-1

6-2

6-3

6-2

9-3

2-13

4-7

4-7

9-3

B-18

7-1

C-8

2-6

2-7

2-8

2-9

G-1

2-10

2-13

2-14

2-16

2-2

8-1

2-11

2-10

6-2

4-10

2-20

2-3

2-4

2-2

4-4

4-4

5-6

5-7

5-6

G-1

Index 5

price fields

formatting option

monetary formatting

restrictions with check digits

restrictions with incrementing

syntax

print adjustments

print area

print contrast/vert adjustment

print control

in batch control field

syntax

printer configuration

6-2

2-8




header



packet C

packet guidelines

packet overview

packet sample



upload syntax

printer status

explanation of response overview requesting syntax

printers

communication checklist

data errors

data formatting errors

hard printer failure errors

machine fault errors

printhead

unit of measure compatibility

printing

black to white ratio

canceling

horiz adjustment

ordering packets to download

7-1

7-1

7-1

7-1

8-2

8-3

8-11

8-15

8-12, 8-15

1-5

5-2

2-11

2-5

6-1 overview

test label

vert adjustment

problems

check digit miscalculated

communication check

dpi varies with printer

framing error while downloading

6-1

8-1

2-5

getting technical support

human readables cut off image time and changing data

image time and unchanging data

imaging time and repeating field parameters

9-3

invalid packet syntax

list of data errors

2-2

8-3

4-5

8-2

1-5

6-1

8-3

9-3

9-3

9-2

2-14

2-13

2-10

2-3

2-16

2-9

2-8

2-5

2-3

2-4

2-7

2-6

2-4

list of format errors

list of hard printer failure errors

list of machine fault errors

list of memory card errors

8-11

8-15

8-12

8-15

missing/overlapping due to magnification9-3

4-5

2-9

4-5

4-1

4-5

2-5

1-4

2-8

6 Index

no check digit generated

off tag errors

other resources

poor print quality

running out of printer memory

procedures

daily checklist

programming conventions

proportional fonts, magnification of

proportionally spaced fonts

definition of term

R

RAM

storing images

receive buffer

requesting job status

explanation of

requesting printer status

explanation of overview

resetting packet control characters

response

to job request 0-2

to job request 3

to job request 4

ribbon selection

rotating

bar codes

constant text characters constant text fields

text characters text fields

rough sketches

RS232 trailer characters


run length graphic packet

sample

Russian characters

S

sample


bar code density option

batch control field

batch data field

batch header

batch method downloading

batch packet

calculate check digit option

check digit scheme packet


compliance formats

configuration packet


copy field

font packet

font, bold style font, standard style

format

format header

hex graphic packet

immediate command

2-14

4-6

6-2

6-3

6-2

6-4

A-10

4-5

4-10

2-13

A-9

2-4

2-10

4-3

2-21

B-5

B-5

A-1

3-2

5-10

2-11

4-5

9-3

8-3

9-1

2-20

1-3

2-2

B-6

G-2

7-7

7-8

7-9

2-7

3-13

3-15

3-15

3-5

3-5

1-4

8-1

5-11

C-7

5-5

2-17

7-7

7-1

7-1

2-11

7-9

2-16

2-9

B-4

4-4

4-5

2-8

2-5

4-8

7-1

7-7

7-7

7-8

B-6

5-11

6-4

2-7

2-6

3-3

A-11

B-18

2-18

4-10

4-7

3-17

3-9

4-10

2-11

6-4

2-1

2-14

2-13

2-14

2-7

2-13

3-2

2-6

2-8

2-9

2-9

2-6

2-13

2-8

2-8

2-8

2-8

2-7

2-1

2-13

3-2

2-7

3-2

2-13

B-4

B-6

9-1

G-2

4-3

inc/dec field option

inquiry response

job request job response 0-2

job response 3

job response 4

memory configuration packet F


monospaced font magnification

padding data

price field option


printer configuration uploaded

proportional font magnification

run length graphic packet

sequential method downloading



text field

zero batch packet

scalable font

buffer

schemes

customizing check digits

security/truncation

using option 51

segments

defining

selecting bar code type

selector, check digit

description of

sending immediate commands

sequential downloading

serial communication

setting

backfeed distance

baud rate

dispense position

feed mode

flow control

format number

language

margin position

monetary symbol number of decimal places

online mode

parity

print contrast print position print speed printhead width

ribbon

serial communication

stop bits

supply size

supply type/position

unit of measure

word length

size of

monospaced fonts

proportional fonts

smart imaging

soft fonts

definition of term

source field, of copy data

special char, using w/batch data

speed adjustment selection

status polling

overview

stop bits selection

storage device

storing

images images in RAM

sum of digits calculation

sum of products calculation

supply

about the layout grid

6-3

2-8

7-1

2-13

5-5

5-5

5-5

4-11

4-10

measurement on a grid

type/position selection

supply setup

syntax

supply type/position selection

symbol set

ANSI

entering

1-5

1-5

2-7

2-7

2-8

C-1

C-1

C-2

Internal table

options

selecting

symbols

monetary

syntax



constant text field

font upload packet

format header


C-2

3-6

C-1

4-5

2-14

2-13

3-14, 3-16

2-20

3-2

2-16


packet control characters packet E


printer configuration upload



system setup

syntax

2-9

2-10

2-8

2-4

2-7

2-6

2-6

T

table

bar code lengths

ENQ reference byte 2

ENQ reference byte 3

fixed/variable bar codes

hexadecimal conversion

immediate commands

job status 0-2

run length conversion

special char, sample batch data

technical support

terms defined

test label

list of information

printing

3-8

7-3 - 7-6

7-5

3-8

C-16

2-11

7-9

C-20

6-3

8-3

G-1

8-2

8-1

Index 7

text fields

character rotation

color attributes

defining determining distance determining distance

justification

modifying character height

modifying character spacing

3-5

3-4, 3-15

3-3

3-3

3-3

3-5

3-4

3-3, 3-14

modifying character width 3-4

placing proportionally spaced characters3-3

rotating

syntax

3-5

3-3

thickness

line

trailing spaces

finding

3-18

9-3

transmit buffer

transparent overlay

2-17

explanation 3-4

TrueType font 2-6, 3-16, B-1, B-19, B-21, C-2

C-7, C-10 Turkish characters

types of fields

brief description 1-6

U

unit of measure

setting

unsuccessful communication

uploading

configuration

font packet

V

3-2

8-2

2-4

2-20

variable length

padding for

vector fonts buffer

vectors

defining

Vietnamese characters

volatile RAM

definition of term

4-4

2-18

3-17

C-12

G-2

W

width/length

using option 52

word length selection

worksheet

check digit

filling in

format

online configuration

overview

4-7

2-13

D-3

1-6

D-1

D-3

1-6

8 Index

Avery Dennison Printer Systems Division

170 Monarch Lane

Miamisburg, OH 45342

1-800-543-6650 (In the U.S.A.)

1-800-387-4740 (In Canada) www.monarch.com

0 28028

Avery Dennison 9493 Printer Reference Manual

Packet Reference Manual

9493™ Printer

c

24pt Sample

Sample

Sample

ÿ

Supply Layout

(Inches)

Supply Layout

(Metric)

Supply Layout

(Dots)

Avery Dennison Printer Systems Division

170 Monarch Lane

Miamisburg, OH 45342

Related manuals

Table of contents

Avery Dennison 9493 Printer Reference Manual

Packet Reference Manual

9493™ Printer

c

24pt Sample

Sample

Sample

ÿ

Supply Layout

(Inches)

Supply Layout

(Metric)

Supply Layout

(Dots)

Avery Dennison Printer Systems Division

170 Monarch Lane

Miamisburg, OH 45342

Related manuals

Avery Dennison

9416XL

Avery Dennison

Pathfinder 6032

Avery Dennison

Monarch 9416 XL

Monarch

9906

Avery Dennison

Monarch 9419

Avery Dennison

Monarch ADTP1

Paxar

Printer 9433

Paxar

MPCL II

Avery Dennison

Monarch 9860

Table of contents